Home

"user manual"

1. HQ _1920 23 9P ram Momon PPRERI E mn za CCH EE i TCR 00 00 00 00 STR TCR 00 25 05 00 END DUR 00 25 05 00 a CH1 CH2 Image of the current clip Clip name In SD mode only for clips that have been divided Image of the previous clip because the file size was greater than 2 GB the Press the PREV button to display the properties of number of component clips appears after the clip the previous clip name When clip names are 12 characters or longer only Image of the next clip the first five characters and the last five characters Press the NEXT button to display the properties are displayed If you want to check the of the next clip abbreviated characters press the MENU knob to switch to long display mode In long display mode up to 53 characters are displayed in clip names Thumbnail Operations Press the MENU knob again to exit long display mode Pressing the PREV or NEXT button to display the previous or next clip also exists long display mode Lock mark This appears when the clip is marked with an OK mark or protected OK NG KP mark This appears only when an OK NG KP mark has been added Date and start time of recording File format The file format of the clip MXF MP4 or AVI appears Special recording information This displays the mode of clips that have been recorded in a s
2. Clip Thumbnail Displays the normal thumbnail screen All Clip Thumbnail Displays the all clips thumbnail screen see page 101 Set Shot Mark Add Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark UDF FAT HD thumbnail screen adds a Shot Mark1 mark see page 108 Delete Shot Mark1 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark thumbnail screen deletes a Shot Mark1 mark see page 108 Add Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark thumbnail screen adds a Shot Mark2 mark see page 108 Delete Shot Mark2 In the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark thumbnail screen deletes a Shot Mark2 mark see page 108 Set Clip Flag OK Adds an OK mark UDF NG Adds an NG mark KP Keep Adds a KP mark None Deletes an OK an NG or a KP mark Add OK Mark Adds an OK mark and protects a clip see page 103 FAT HD Delete OK Mark Deletes an OK mark and unprotects a clip see page 103 FAT HD Lock Clip Protects a clip UDF Unlock Clip Cancels protection of a clip UDF Thumbnail Operations Menu items Sub items Description Copy Clip Copies a clip see page 104 Delete Clip Deletes a clip see page 105 Divide Clip Divides a clip see page 108 FAT HD Filter Clips Displays the OK clip thumbnail screen see page 100 FAT HD Filter Clips OK Displays the OK clip thumb
3. Rear MIC CH2 Ref 70dB 60dB 50dB Selects the reference input level 40dB 30dB 20dB when the setting of the AUDIO IN CH2 switch is MIC Line Input Ref 4dB 0dB 3dB EBUL Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to LINE Min Alarm Volume Off Set Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is turned all the way down Off Almost inaudible Set Fairly audible Speaker Attenuate Off 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB Selects the volume from the monitor speakers does not affect earphone volume Headphone Out Mono Stereo Selects whether the earphones are monaural Mono or stereo Stereo Reference Level 20dB 18dB 16dB 12dB EBUL Selects the output level of the 1 kHz test signal Reference Out 0dB 4dB 3dB EBUL Specifies the output level with respect to the reference input level CH1 amp 2 AGC Mode Mono Stereo For automatic adjustment of the input level of analog audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2 specifies whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel Mono or in stereo mode Stereo Menu List sBunjes payejaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 141 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 142 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Audio Makes settings related to audio CH3 amp 4 AGC Mode Mono Stereo For automatic adjustment of the input level of analog au
4. mode CALL Being called from a connected displayedin device red PREVIEW During recording review Wireless receiver reception level When a wireless receiver is installed in the camcorder W appears together with four segment reception level indicators for each of the channels 1 to 4 that can be used by the receiver The indications are as follows In normal situation The number of white segments indicates the strength of the signal level Muting for an analog receiver or error rate aggravation for a digital receiver The number of grey segments indicates the strength of the signal level Reception level over peak P is displayed instead of the indicators Tuner battery is low The channel number and indicator of the corresponding channel flash 1 When an optional DWR SO1D is used EJ Battery remaining voltage capacity The following is displayed depending on the type of power source Type of power What is displayed source InfoLithium Remaining battery capacity icon battery and remaining recording time Anton Bauer battery Remaining battery capacity indication Other type than Input voltage above EJ External power input Appears when power is supplied from an external power source connected to the DC IN connector Color temperature Displays a color temperature calculated from the gain of R and B in the range 1 5 K to 50 0 K in steps of 0 1 K The
5. IFU WLM3 USB Type to Infra or Adhoc Q Wireless LAN SSID Network connection Sets the network connection name g module is required name of up to 32 characters fo This item is Network Type Infra Adhoc Selects the connection mode D disabled displayed Infra Infrastructure mode in grey during Adhoc Ad hoc mode 2 recording and play When the CBK WA01 is in use 2 For details on Wi Fi Adhoc will be the default setting connection refer to When IFU WLM3 is in use Infra o the Supplement will be the default setting supplied in the CD Ch 1to 11 When Network Type is set to D ROM labeled Adhoc set the wireless channel 2 Manuals for Solid Authentication Open Shared WPA Selects the network authentication a State Memory WPA2 OPEN Open system authentication i Camcorder SHARED Shared key authentication WPA WPA Wi Fi Protected Access authentication WPA2 WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access 2 authentication Menu List 153 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 154 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Wi Fi Setting Encryption Disable WEP TKIP AES Selects whether to apply data Makes settings for encryption and the type of data Wi Fi connection encryption Disable Do not apply data Notes encryption e The CBK WAO1 WEP Apply WEP Wired Wi Fi Adapter or Equivalent Privacy when IFU WLM3 USB Authentication is set to Open Wireless LAN or Shared module
6. Level 99 to 0 to 99 Sets the aperture level Skin Detail Makes settings related to skin detail correction Skin detail correction is Skin Detail On Off Turns skin detail correction on or off Area Detection Color detection screen Detects the color to be targeted by skin detail correction processing that Area Indication On Off Turns on or off the function that increases or decreases displays a zebra pattern in the area the detail level of a targeted by skin detail correction speed color range zaye 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the skin detail level skin tone range for the purpose of Saturation 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the saturation of the color obtaining attractive targeted by skin detail correction reproduction of skin Hue 0 to 359 Specifies the hue of the color tones targeted by skin detail correction Width 0 to 40 to 90 Specifies a range for the hue of the color targeted by skin detail correction Matrix Matrix On Off Turns the matrix correction function Makes settings related on or off to matrix correction Preset Matrix On Off Turns the preset matrix function on Matrix correction ff allows you to adjust the Op Ot color and vividness of Preset Select 1 2 3 4 5 6 Selects a preset matrix the video Depending 1 SMPTE 240M equivalent on the effect you want 2 ITU 709 equivalent you can select one from 3 SMPTE WIDE equivalent amon
7. 4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp Preparing the Audio Input System 45 Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors using an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM 674 678 On how to attach the CAC 12 refer to the operation manual for the CAC 12 1 Attach the electret condenser microphone suoleledeld gsajdeyo Loosen the ball joint lock lever Wind the microphone spacer sheet type supplied with the microphone around the microphone while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top Close the microphone holder Tighten the screw Position so that the microphone does not interfere with the viewfinder and tighten the ball joint lock lever Microphone 46 Preparing the Audio Input System Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Set the switches as follows Set the AUDIO IN selectors indicated below depending on the power supply type of the microphone Internal power supply MIC External power supply 48V e Set the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR AUDIO IN selectors Monaural micr
8. gt lt Planning Metadata Operations lt Meta name _ShotMark4 content BEEREN gt lt Meta name _ShotMark5 content gt lt Meta name _ShotMark6 content B0 gt lt Meta name _ShotMark7 content BRJ gt lt Meta name _ShotMark8 content B gt lt Meta name _ShotMark9 content BAGIHAIE gt lt Meta name _ShotMark0 content Rego gt lt Properties gt lt PlanningMetadata gt When you create a definition file enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line and do not enter spaces except where specified except within essence mark name strings p p p You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add in application software supplied with the CBK WAO1 Wi Fi Adapter to Essence mark names For details refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK WAO1 A thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button in E E or playback mode Thumbnail screens display lists of the clips stored on SxS memory cards in the form of index pictures A message appears if you insert a memory card that contains no clips You can select any clip see page 96 in a thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip see page 96 Thumbnail Screen In thumbnail screens the timecode of the index picture appears beneath the thumbnail for each clip An OK NG or KP mark also appears when a clip has
9. Bottom of viewfinder screen TLCS iris control mode The following icons are displayed to indicate the video level control modes based on the Total Level Control System TLCS Icon TLCS control mode Backlight mode STD Standard mode Al Spotlight mode ALAC indicator ALAC will be displayed when ALAC Auto Lens Aberration Compensation is set to be performed automatically for chromatic aberration of magnification ALAC is performed automatically when an ALAC compatible lens is attached the ALAC function is enabled and MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt ALAC is set to Auto in the setup menu Focus adjustment mode when the auto focus lens is mounted Indicates the current focus adjustment mode of the camcorder AF Auto Focus mode e MF Manual Focus mode e MF Manual Focus mode when the MF Assist function is on Full MF Full Manual Focus mode EJ External device control REC2 blinks when MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt HD SDI Remote I F is set to Chara in the setup menu and a recording control signal is output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector In addition when MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt SDI Rec Control is set to Para in the setup menu Rec2 P blinks during recording Depending on the status of the external device connected to the HD SD SDI OUT connector Para may not be displayed even when MAINTENANCE gt Camer
10. External device connector Connect an optional CBK WAO1 Wi Fi Adapter an IFU WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module a CBK WA100 Wireless Adapter or a USB flash drive When a CBK WA01 an IFU WLM3 or a CBK WA100 is connected Wireless LAN connection is available When a USB flash drive is connected Recording saving and loading the following data are available e Recording of proxy data see page 87 Loading of planning metadata see page 89 Save and load setting data see page 166 Use this connector only for connecting a CBK WAO1 an IFU WLM3 a CBK WA100 ora USB flash drive Do not connect and use a USB hub or similar products For details on how to use the CBK WAOI and the 1FU WLM3 refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder For details on how to use the CBK WA100 refer to the operation manual for the CBK WA100 EJ SxS memory card slots These two slots A and B can receive SxS memory cards or other recording media see page 71 ACCESS lamps Indicate the state of slots A and B see page 71 You can check whether the lamps are lit even when the slot cover is closed al EJECT buttons To remove the recording media from the slot press the EJECT button to release the lock then press the button once more This makes the media come out of the slot partially see page 72 Slot cover Slide to the left and right to open and close EJ SLOT SELECT Sx
11. To adjust automatically Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3 4 switch to AUTO To adjust manually Set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3 4 switch to MANUAL 2 Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level items under MAINTENANCE gt Audio in the setup menu Audio CH3 Level Channel 3 recording level Setting Knob Side3 LEVEL CH3 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Front Side3 LEVEL CH3 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation Audio CH4 Level Channel 4 recording level Setting Knob Side4 LEVEL CH4 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Adjusting the Audio Level sBunjes pue sluewisnfpy g ls deUD 63 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Je deyo 64 Setting Knob Front Side4 LEVEL CH4 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation You can now adjust the levels of audio channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here Setting the Time Data Setting the Time Data When picture cache mode is enabled it is not possible to set time data even if you set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET If you want to set time data first exit picture cache mode Setting the Timecode The timecode setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames T Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display Set the DISPLAY switch to TC Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 4 Set
12. Table of Contents Chart of Optional Components and Accessories sccccsccscesceseesees 197 ADOUET LINK a oscssescacsessesscasessisovnsvatenseatonsocedssonssnseusevssalessssceadssasenssassesieass 198 MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License csccsscssssccscsscesseseeeees 199 MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License cscsscsscsccscsscsseseeseees 199 About Bitmap Fonts ccccssccscscssccssssssscsssssssessesssssssesssssssssesscssseesseses 199 About OpenSSL cccsscssscsssscsscscsscssssessesscssessessessessessessescssesseseeseeee 200 DEET CS ccsssscsascsconccseccesssenssecoecseseasoossennscnassoscecasscosecaseacsnesoecconasonesonedenaseeavees 203 Table of Contents 11 12 Foreword Before Use After purchasing the PMW 500 Solid State Memory Camcorder before operating it is necessary to set the area of use Unless this setting is made the camcorder will not operate For details of these settings see Setting the Area of Use page 42 Before attaching removing optional components or accessories to from the PMW 500 referred to as the camcorder be sure to turn the power of the camcorder off Foreword Mode Indications in This Manual Mode Indications in This Manual Some functions and information are available only when this camcorder is in a specific operating mode This manual indicates those modes by using the following marks When these marks appea
13. e PHU 220R Professional Harddisk Unit e MEAD MS01 SD02 Media Adaptor when the recording mode is FAT or QDA EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adapter when the recording mode is FAT UDF For details refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder About SxS Memory Cards SxS memory cards that can be used with this camcorder Use the following Sony SxS memory cards SxS PRO or SxS 1 with this camcorder SxS PRO e SBP 32 32 GB e SBP 64A 64 GB SxS 1 SBS 32G1A 32 GB SBS 64G1A 64 GB Proper operation cannot be guaranteed when memory cards other than SxS PRO and SxS 1 are used The memory cards listed above comply with the ExpressCard memory card standard SxS SxS PRO and SxS 1 are trademarks of Sony Corporation The ExpressCard label and logo are property of the Personal Computer Memory Card Handling SxS Memory Cards International Association PCMCIA and are licensed to Sony Corporation Other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners Notes on the use of SxS memory cards Recorded data may be lost or corrupted in the following cases When the camcorder is subjected to shock or vibrations during reading writing or formatting of an SxS memory card and when the camcorder is powered off or an SxS memory card is removed during reading writing or formatting When the camcorder is used in an environment subject t
14. gt Moves the cursor to the right ESC Cancels the change and return to the normal menu END Executes the change and return to the normal menu e Title prefix area one line An area to enter the title To set titles 1 Turn the MENU knob or press the arrow buttons to select a character highlighting it in the character selection area and then press the MENU knob or the SET button to insert it at the cursor position in the title prefix area The cursor moves to the right 2 Repeat step 1 to add more characters to the title using Space INS and DEL as required 3 When you have finished entering the title select END to close the Character Set screen Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Clip Number Set 00001 to 99999 Specifies the initial value of the numeric Make settings for clip part five digits of clip names The name or clip numeric part of clip names is limited to managements four digits number if Auto Naming is Note set to other than Plan or if planning D are metadata is invalid though Auto o not assign clip names that begin with Naming is set to Plan the period Name Display Off Viewfinder LCD Selects whether or not to display the symbol Status Both name of the next clips to be recorded in Clips with names in E E mode and where to display the which the first character is cannot name be viewed on the Off Do not display application softwar
15. prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL About OpenSSL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE gt k This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay Qcryptsoft com This product includes software
16. 189 xlpueddy 190 EE Appendix important Notes on Operation Use and storage Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped e If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe is subjected to severe shock the accessory shoe may be damaged In such a case stop using it and contact your dealer or a Sony service representative Do not cover the camcorder while operating Putting a cloth for example over the camcorder can cause excessive internal heat build up After use Always turn off the POWER switch Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack Shipping e Remove the media before transporting the camcorder e If sending the camcorder by truck ship air or other transportation service pack it in the shipping carton of the camcorder Care of the camcorder Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower If the body of the camcorder is dirty clean it with a soft dry cloth In extreme cases use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the camcorder In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the camcorder contact a Sony service representative Important Notes on Operation Use and storage locations Store
17. Indicators and status display 29 Initial value 112 Input source 35 Internal clock 43 Interval Rec 81 Iris position 36 L LCD monitor LCD panel 21 Lens cable clamp 17 locking lever 17 mount 17 mountcap 17 mount securing rubber 17 mounting 43 LENS connector 17 Lens file s loading 170 loading automatically 171 saving 170 setting data 170 LEVEL CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 knobs 23 LIGHT connector 17 LIGHT switch 15 Line input audio equipment connecting 48 Live amp Play 78 21 27 Maintenance 180 Media remaining capacity 28 36 status 32 MENU button 23 MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch 20 MENU knob 18 MENU ON OFF switch 20 MIC IN 48 V connector 17 MIC LEVEL control 18 Microphone holder 30 31 fitting 17 Microphone connecting 45 MIRROR switch 30 MONITOR knob 19 MONITOR switches 19 Monitor connecting 173 MPEG TS adapter 16 ND filter 18 NEXT button 22 Nonlinear editing 176 178 Number of system lines 33 0 OK NG KP mark s 94 103 adding 103 deleting 103 setting 80 Operation status 32 ofi LINK device 35 Optional components 197 OUTPUT DCC switch 19 P PC connector 25 PEAKING control 29 30 Picture Cache 80 Planning metadata 89 PLAY PAUSE button indicator 21 Plug 29 30 Power source voltage battery remaining capacity 33 Power supply 37 POWER switch 15 Preset values resetting 168 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 24 PREV button 22 Proxy data 87 R REC START button 17 Recor
18. Remote IF and you are controlling recording operations on an external device this specifies the method used to indicate that recording on the external device is in progress Chara Indicate by the external device control indication on the viewfinder screen G Tally Indicate by the green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder or green tally indicator on the screen of the CBK VFO1 viewfinder R Tally Indicate by the recording red tally indicators in the HDVF series viewfinder or the special recording mode operation status indication on the screen of the CBK VFO1 viewfinder This setting is disabled when SDI Rec Control is set to Para It will be fixed at Chara in such cases Match Clip Name On Off When SDI Rec Control is set to Para this specifies whether to output matching clip names to the HD SD SDI output On Output Off Do not output This setting is disabled when SDI Rec Control is set to a setting other than Para It will be fixed at Off in such cases The Match Clip Name setting cannot be changed while recording to a memory card is in progress or during iLINK output Clip names that consist of at least 4 alphanumeric ASCII characters can be output spaces and symbols are not supported If clip names that do not conform to the above are output they will be changed according to the default settings of the external device Menu List sBunjes p
19. WRR Setting Timecode Essence Mark Camera Config Preset White White Filter DCC Adjust Auto Iris2 Genlock ND Comp Lens Auto Shading APR Trigger Mode Network Setting Wi Fi Setting Clock set Language Hours Meter Version Setup Menu Organization and Levels Basic Setup Menu Operations To display the setup menu Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON or press the MENU button The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu list appears on the screen A cursor appears over the first two characters of the most recently used menu and the corresponding menu item selection area appears to the right Example When the cursor is positioned at the OPERATION menu Menu list OPERATION Format Format Media a fa Input Output Menu item selection area The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in focus magnification mode Exit focus magnification mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag function has been assigned To make menu settings 1 Turn the MENU knob or press the 4 or J button to move the cursor to the item that you want to set A list of selectable menu items appears in the menu item selection area to the right of the icon 2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button The cursor moves to the menu item selection area You can also move the cursor to the menu item selection area by pressing the gt button e The menu item selection area displays a maximum of seven lines
20. You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and delete shot marks in clips For details see Adding and Deleting Shot Marks page 108 To record shot marks Do one of the following e Turn on an assignable switch to which Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 has been assigned see page 161 e If Lens RET has been assigned to the RET button on the lens operate as follows To record shot mark 1 Press the RET button once To record shot mark 2 Press the RET button twice in quick succession When a shot mark is recorded a Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 indication appears in the viewfinder for about three seconds near the timecode indication Advanced Operations Buqooys b 13 deyo 79 Bunooys p Je dBUD 80 Setting OK Marks UDF FAT HD To make it easier for editors to select good clips you can set OK marks in clips recorded in HD mode OK marks cannot be set or deleted during recording or playback To add delete OK marks You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to add and delete OK marks in previously recorded clips For details see Adding and Deleting OK NG or KP Marks page 103 Starting to Record from Pre stored Video Picture Cache Function The camcorder is equipped with enough internal memory to pre store up to 15 seconds of video and audio data in a picture cache This allows you to begin recording a specified number of seconds in advance of the time when you pres
21. cceceeceeseeseeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeseeneeeeees 55 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance scssssssee 56 Adjusting the Black Balance e eoeeeeeea aaa aaa 56 Adjusting the White Balance 0 cccceesescesceesceeceeeeseeseeseeceeseeaeens 57 Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter Modes wasze SOW OO OE Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed 1 59 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment 61 Adjusting the Audio Level Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 Connectors eeeseeeaaea aaa aaawa ca 62 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector 62 Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 eoeeeeoeaaeoeaaea 63 Setting the Time Data uoo nooeoneoaowooaowoowowaowo snow owane owad nowo oda 0 WoW 000000000 64 Setting the Timecode niinn A LALA AE RA da 64 Setting the User Bits gw WRO AE 65 Synchronizing the Timecode eeeeeee oaza 65 Setting Shot Data cccsccsccscescsscssssssssssessessescsssessssssessccsesseesessessessesseese 67 Creating a Shot Disiet oe O AO ALA 67 Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information Status Screens OR ERO TORZE AO ORC 68 Chapter 4 Shooting Handling SxS Memory Cards csscccsssssssssssssssssssssscssscssssessesessssseseses 70 About SxS Memory Cards eeeeeee
22. for example by selecting a different video format Picture data from before the change is not recorded even if you start recording immediately after the change The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode automatically Frame Rec settings cannot be changed during recording Frame Rec is disabled when the following formats are selected In FAT mode SP 1440 59 94i or SP 1440 50i when the output setting is HD and OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK I O in the setup menu is set to Enable In FAT mode SP 1440 23 98P pull down recording In UDF mode HD420 HQ 1280x720 23 98P pull down recording Other than HQ 1920 23 98P or HQ 1280 23 98P when the output setting is SD and OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK I O in the setup menu is set to Enable To make Frame Rec settings Select OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Frame Rec in the setup menu For menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 2 Turn the MENU knob to select On and then press the knob The camcorder enters Frame Rec mode the Frame Rec indication on the viewfinder screen flashes The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes 3 Select Number of Frames turn the MENU knob to select the number of frames to record in one take and then press the knob You can select from 1 3 6 9 or from 2 6 12 when the video format setting is 720 59 94P or 720 50P The camcorder exits Frame Rec mode when
23. indication The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording To stop shooting Stop the recording It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when Frame Rate is set to a low value for a slow frame rate To exit Slow amp Quick Motion mode With the camcorder in recording standby mode set OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Slow amp Quick in the setup menu to Off Limitations during recording The i LINK HDV DV connector cannot be used e Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always R RUN Audio cannot be recorded when the recording and playback frame rates differ Recording review is not possible If you change the recording frame rate to a value faster than the current shutter speed the shutter speed is changed to the slowest value for which shooting is possible Example If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter speed is Mans and you change the frame rate to 55 then the shutter speed is changed to Feo If is not possible to select a shutter speed that is slower than the recording frame rate Genlock is not possible Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function Normally a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording But this function allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to
24. planning metadata files stored in the USB flash drive and select a file to execute the load Properties Execute Cancel Displays the detailed information in the planning metadata loaded on the camcorder execute by selecting Execute Clear Execute Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded on the camcorder execute by selecting Execute Clip Name Disp __ Titlel ASCID Title2 UTF 8 Selects the display mode of the clip name specified in planning metadata see page 91 USB Memory Rec Enable Disable Select whether to enable or disable the Makes settings for record of proxy data to a USB flash operating a USB drive flash drive in UDF Copy Current Clip Execute Cancel Executes the copy of the proxy data for mode only the current clip to a USB flash drive execute by selecting Execute Copy All Clips Execute Cancel Executes the copy of the proxy data for all clips stored in the selected SxS memory card to a USB flash drive execute by selecting Execute When USB gt With General Files is set to Enable all the data under the General folder is also copied Del All Memory Execute Cancel sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 se deyo Executes the clear of the proxy data for Clips all clips copied to a USB flash drive execute by selecting Execute Format USB Execute Cancel Executes the FAT32 format of a USB Memory flash drive execute by selecting Execute With Genera
25. signs may be displayed depending on the Offset White setting see page 128 No display Offset White is OFF The value of Offset White is greater than 3200K The value of Offset White is less than 3200K M8IAJ8AO JE deUuD Number of system lines Indicates the number of system lines 1080 720 576 480 486 of video currently being recorded or played back 1 In SD mode when OPERATION gt Format gt Country is set to other than PAL Area in the setup menu In UDF mode 486 In FAT mode 480 In UDF mode the system frequency 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P 50i 25P 59 94P 50P is also displayed here Video format Indicates the video format for recording or the video format of clip being currently played back see page 53 The video aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 can also be displayed when the recording format is set to IMX50 or DVCAM Depth of field indication when the serial lens is mounted and when the CBK VF01 is used Error warning indication A bar indicates the depth of field The display unit is meters or feet as selected by OPERATION gt Display On Off gt Lens Info in the setup menu An error or warning message is displayed here depending on the situation Under this area you can also display the name of the next clip to be recorded see page 131 Special recording mode indication The following is displayed when the camcorder is in a special recording mode e Frame Rec Frame Recording mode e Inter
26. the range from 0 to 99 Focus position when the serial lens is mounted Indicates the focus position as distance to the subject in units of m Green tally Lights when the camcorder is the following states e MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt HD SDI Remote I F is set to G Tally in the setup menu and a recording control signal is output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector e When the Picture Cache mode is enabled Green tally signal received when a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a camera extension unit is connected Media status Displays the name of the currently active media slot A or B KJ Special recording mode operation status Indicates the current special recording mode operation status as follows Indication Meaning REC Recording in progress STBY When recording is on a break in Clip Continuous Rec mode or standby in other modes CONT Standby for next recording in Clip Continuous Rec mode CACHE Standby in Picture Cache mode INT REC Recording in progress in Interval Recording mode Indication Meaning INT STBY Standby for next recording in Interval Recording mode FRM REC Recording in progress in Frame Recording mode FRM Standby for next recording in STBY Frame Recording mode FRM STBY Standby in Frame Recording mode S amp QREC Recording in progress in Slow amp Quick Motion mode S amp QSTBY Standby in Slow amp Quick Motion
27. those of 23 98P are output as 2 3 pulled down NTSC signals Connecting External Monitors 173 sedineq eule Xq Bunoeuu0g g lajdEUD 174 HD SD SDI OUT connector BNC The HD SD SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports SDI The device type can be a monitor switcher or VTR or other recording device The output from this connector can be turned on and off with OPERATION gt Input Output gt SDI Output in the setup menu see page 116 For connection use a BNC cable not supplied VIDEO OUT connector The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports analog composite signal The device type can be a monitor or VTR or other recording device The output signal varies as shown in the following table depending on the setting of OPERATION gt Output amp i LINK in the setup menu Setting Output signal HD amp HDV in FAT HD Y analog signal which mode has the same video format HD in UDF mode with the signal output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector SD amp HDV or Composite signal which has SD amp DV in FAT the same video format with mode the signal output from the SD in UDF mode HD SD SDI OUT connector When OPERATION gt Format gt HD SD in the setup menu is SD the output composite signal is the same as the NTSC or PAL encoded signal that is output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector a Use OPERATION gt Format gt Country see page 115 in the s
28. to the external device connector Select User Save USB gt Execute in step 2 The ACCESS lamp does not light while the save is being executed in step 5 Loading Setting Data mg When you load a file from an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode the data saved in the camcorder s internal memory is overwritten Depending on the settings of Load Customize Data and User Load White under FILE gt User in the setup menu When Load Customize Data is set to Off Only USER menu settings are loaded When Load Customize Data is set to On USER menu configuration and settings are loaded When User Load White is set to Off White balance data is not loaded When User Load White is set to On White balance data is loaded See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations 1 Select FILE gt User in the setup menu 2 Select User Load SxS gt Execute A list box of user files appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers File numbers with a file name or a date and time are the number of files that already contain data 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired file number Press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the load select Execute and then press the MENU knob To Saving and Loading User Files cancel the load select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you choose to execute the load th
29. 23 98P selects whether to use progressive output PsF or pulldown output Pull Down Source Select Camera i LINK Selects whether to use the camera External picture Camera the i LINK input in FAT mode only or the SDI composite input External as the video input source e When Rec Source is assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch this setting is disabled e Changing the setting of File System gt UDF FAT resets this item to Camera factory default setting Ext Video Source HD SDI SD SDI Composite Selects the external input signal HD SDI HDSDI signals in HD mode only SD SDI SDSDI signals Composite Composite signals i LINK I O Enable Disable Selects whether to enable or disable input and output of signals via the i LINK HDV DV connector When Enable is selected you can execute auto black balance adjustment during i LINK output SDI Output On Off Turns on or off the output of signals from the HD SD SDI OUT connector SDI Out Super On Off Turns on or off the superimposition of text information on the output of the HD SD SDI OUT connector Video Out Super On Off Turns on or off the superimposition of text information on the output of the VIDEO OUT connector Live amp Play On Off Turns Live amp Play function on or off Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Input Output Down Converter Crop Letter Sque
30. 5 Point the camcorder at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it 6 Set the zoom ring to wide angle T Turn the Ff or F B ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto 9 Tighten the F f or F B ring fixing screws Preparing the Audio Input System Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector You can attach the optional ECM 680S stereo microphone to the microphone holder of the viewfinder optional The following procedure is an example for attaching a microphone holder to the HDVF 20A For procedures for attaching a microphone holder to other viewfinders refer to a manual supplied with each viewfinder 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp Microphone holder clamp 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Wind the microphone spacer around the microphone while peeling off the protective sheets on both sides of the microphone spacer Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top Close the microphone holder Tighten the screw SUONEJIEdSId Z 19 dBUDJ On how to perform this operation refer to the operation manual for the microphone Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT
31. Backlight Standard Selects the auto iris mode used when the Makes settings Spotlight TLCS system is activated related to total level Backlight Backlight mode lessens the control blackout of the main subject that occurs under backlit conditions Standard Standard mode Spotlight Spotlight mode lessens the whiteout of the main subject that occurs under a spotlight Speed 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the control speed speed of reaction to changes in the video used when the TLCS system is activated Larger values specify quicker reaction times AGC On Off Turns the AGC auto gain control function on or off AGC Limit 3dB 6dB 9dB 12dB Specifies the maximum gain used when 18dB AGC is on AGC Point F5 6 F4 F2 8 Specifies the F value where control by auto iris switches to control by AGC used when AGC is on Auto Shutter On Off Turns the auto shutter function on or off Auto Shutter Limit 1 100 1 150 1 200 Selects the maximum shutter speed used 1 250 when auto shutter is on Auto Shutter Point F5 6 F8 F11 F16 Specifies the F value where control by auto iris switches to control by auto shutter used when auto shutter is on Zebra Makes settings related to zebra displays Zebra Select 1 2 BOTH Selects the zebra pattern type Zebral Zebra2 Both Zebral Level 50 to 70 to 107 Specifies the Zebral display level Zebral Aperture Level 1 to 10 to 20 Specifies the Zebral apert
32. Before discarding or disposing of a memory card erase it using commercial data erasure software or physically destroy it Sony cannot be responsible for any failure to erase data completely Clip operations may not be possible when the remaining capacity of the media is low In this case use a computer to delete unneeded files and try again Open the memory card case completely before storing a card in the case or removing a card from the case i Preventing accidental erasure You can prevent accidental recording editing and deletion of data on an SxS memory card by setting the write protect switch to the WP side Write protect switch CH Do not touch the write protect switch while an SxS memory card is loaded in a card slot Eject the card before setting the write protect switch Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory Cards To load SxS memory cards T Slide the cover to the left to open 2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot Insert with the label side facing right The ACCESS lamp lights in orange and then lights in green to indicate that the memory card is usable 3 Close the cover ACCESS lamp status indications Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS lamp to indicate the slot status Lamp Slot status Accessing the SxS memory card lights during data reading and writing Lights in orange Standby the loaded SxS memory card is ready for recordin
33. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE k The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence w About OpenSSL Index Symbols warning indicator 31 A AC power 38 ACCESS lamps 21 25 Accessories optional 197 Accessory fitting shoe 16 Adaptor connector 16 ALARM knob 19 Area setting 42 Arrow buttons lt gt 23 ASSIGN 0 switch 19 ASSIGN 1 2 3 switches 18 ASSIGNABLE 4 5 switches 24 Assignable switches assigning functions 161 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance 20 Audio control section 23 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors 27 AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 switches 24 AUDIO IN selectors 27 Audio input system 45 Audio level adjusting 62 adjusting playback level 19 meters 36 AUDIO OUT connector 27 AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 switches 24 AUTO W B BAL switch 18 BACKLIGHT button 23 BATT indicator 31 Battery attachment shoe 16 of the internal clock exchanging 192 pack 37 remaining 33 BKW 401 39 Black balance adjusting 56 BRIGHT control 29 30 Brightness level 35 C Camera adaptor 16 Camera operator tally indicator 29 Clip Continuous Rec 85 Clip s batch copy 105 copying 104 cueup 96 defining names 90 deleting 79 105 displaying properties 102 dividing 108 operating with a computer 175 operatio
34. Now is displayed to prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the USB connection If you select Cancel or push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE down to the ESCAPE side or if you disconnect the USB cable the message Connect USB Now disappears Cancel If you select Execute and press the MENU knob the USB connection is enabled and this camcorder is recognized as an extension drive You can carry out the same operations by using the arrow buttons tb lt see page 23 USB Connecting If the USB connection is enabled during recording playback operation the operation is stopped and the message USB Connecting appears on the viewfinder screen At this time the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector and HD SD SDI OUT connector changes to a black signal The camcorder cannot be operated for recording playback and so on while the message USB Connecting is displayed When the computer accesses the media loaded in the camcorder do not try to carry out the following operations Operating the camcorder turning the power on off switching the operation mode etc Removing or loading a media from an active slot being accessed from the computer Removing or connecting the USB cable Disabling the USB connection To disable the USB connection follow the same procedure as that for removing a device from the computer To enable the USB connection again first disconnect the
35. R Flare 09 to 0 to 99 Sets the R flare correction level G Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets the G flare correction level B Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets the B flare correction level Gamma Makes settings related to gamma Gamma correction allows you to significantly alter the impression made by the video by adjusting the contrast Gamma On Off Turns gamma correction on or off Step Gamma 0 35 to 0 45 to 0 90 0 05 step Specifies a gamma correction value in steps of 0 05 Master Gamma 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the master gamma level R Gamma 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the R gamma level G Gamma 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the G gamma level B Gamma 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the B gamma level Gamma Select The available settings vary depending on the setting in Gamma Category see lt Description Select the gamma table to use in gamma correction When Gamma Category is STD 1 DVW DVW camcorder equivalent 2 x4 5 x4 5 gain 3 x3 5 x3 5 gain 4 240M SMPTE 240M equivalent 5 R709 ITU R709 equivalent default setting 6 x5 0 x5 0 gain When Gamma Category is HG 1 3250 Condense 325 video input to 100 video output 2 4600 Condense 460 video input to 100 video output 3 3259 Condense 325 video input to 109 video output 4 4609 Condense 460 video input to 109 video output default setting G
36. RET Button on the Lens 165 Chapter 7 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Loading Settings ccccccscsscsssssessessesssscessessssssessessessesees 166 Saving Setting Data eeeeee eee 166 Loading Setting Data ie i O AA A A 167 Resetting a File after Changing Its Contents 1 168 Saving and Loading Scene Files s ssccsccsssscsssccscsecsecssessessessessesees 168 Saving Scene Piles ee A Aa Ad 168 Loading Scene Files a a i a ad ad Oda ti 169 Saving and Loading Lens Files 2 0 0 000000000000000000000ooooooeooeo00 170 Setting Lens File Dat csiis enii aaa E 170 Savine Lens PUCS a A A E 170 L ddimg Een S FilES yw ad A O O A NA A A WE Adi 170 Table of Contents 9 Loading Lens Files Automatically 0 cecececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 171 Saving and Loading User Files scsccscsssessscscescescccscscescessssesseseeseees 171 Saving User Files Loading Setting Data Chapter 8 Connecting External Devices Connecting External Monitors csccssssssssssssssscsssscsssesssesssesesscseeees 173 Operating Clips with a Computer ccssccscsscscccsssescsscssessessessessessers 175 Using the ExpressCard Slot of a Computer 1 121111111 1 175 USB Connection with a Computer e ee oseeeaeaaeaeeaeaaee 175 Connecting an External Device i LINK Connection 2 2 02102
37. SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 1080 and the System Frequency setting is other than 29 97P and 25P HQ 1280 When the UDF FAT setting is FAT the HD SD setting is HD and the HD System Line setting is 720 IMX50 DVCAM When the UDF FAT setting is UDF and the HD SD setting is SD DVCAM When the UDF FAT setting is FAT and the HD SD setting is HD Aspect Ratio SD 16 9 4 3 Selects the aspect ratio when SD mode is selected execute by selecting Execute Audio 24bit 16bit Selects the audio bit rate for recording Length IMX in IMX format Country NTSC Area NTSC J Selects the area of use execute by Area PAL Area selecting Execute Format Media Media A Execute Cancel Initializes the SXS memory card in slot Executes a media A execute by selecting Execute format Media B Execute Cancel Initializes the SXS memory card in slot B execute by selecting Execute Menu List sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 J8 dEUD 115 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 se deyo 116 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Input Output In FAT mode HD amp HDV SD amp HDV Selects the signals output from the Makes settings Output amp i LINK SD amp DV video connectors and the i LINK HDV related to I O signals In UDF mode HD SD DV connector Output When the HD SD setting is SD SD amp DV or SD is selected 23 98P Output PsF Pull Down When the video format is HQ 1920 23 98P or HQ 1440
38. Turn the MENU knob to select an item or sub item and then press the knob e Press the arrow buttons 0 1 lt gt to select an item or sub item and then press the SET button Thumbnail Operations According to the selected item or sub item a selection list or a clip properties screen appears see page 102 To return to the previous state push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side e When an SxS memory card is write protected it is not possible to copy delete or divide clips to change index pictures or to add and delete OK NG KP marks and shot marks Some items cannot be selected depending on the state of the camcorder when the menu was displayed To hide the clip properties screen Do one of the following Press the RESET RETURN button This returns to the THUMBNAIL menu Press the THUMBNAIL button The camcorder enters E E mode and the camera picture appears Press the PLAY PAUSE button Playback from the selected clip starts Changing the Thumbnail Screen Type To display OK NG KP None clip thumbnails When the recording mode is UDF from among all clips stored on the currently selected SxS memory card only clips which have been marked with a OK NG or KP mark can be displayed or only clips with no marks None clips can be displayed When the recording mode is FAT from among all clips stored on the currently selected SxS memory card only clips which have been marked
39. USB cable and then reconnect it The message Connect USB Now appears again Operating Clips with a Computer If you connect the camcorder to the computer using an i LINK cable you cannot use the computer to operate files stored in a recording media loaded in the memory card slot of this camcorder To remove an SxS memory card Windows 1 Click on the icon of Safely Remove Hardware on the task bar of the computer 2 Select Safely remove SxS Memory Card Drive X from the displayed menu 3 Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware message appears then remove the card Macintosh Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to Trash If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder click on the eject icon on its side To use the application software To copy clips to the local disk of your computer the dedicated application software must be downloaded and installed on your computer For details see Software downloads page 14 Although the data regarding recorded materials are stored over multiple files and folders you can easily handle the clips without considering such data and directory structure by using the dedicated application software If you operate e g copy the clips on the SxS memory card by using the Explorer Windows or Finder Macintosh the subsidiary data contained by the clips may not be maintained To use a nonlinear editing system For a nonlinear editing system opt
40. Video Light UC D200A PROTECH Ultralight Anton Bauer Pad CBK SPO1 Soft Type Shoulder Pad Equipment for maintenance and easier handling Hard Carrying Case LC H300 Soft Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Maintenance Manual Specifications Dimensions gt eS 332 13 1 8 in mm inches Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Chart of Optional Components and Accessories ECM 680S 678 HD monitor SD monitor mmp 674 673 Microphone CAC 12 XDCAM HD series recorder Microphone Holder PDW F1600 HD1500 PDW F75 HDCAM series recorder CBK VFO1 HDW 2000 series recorder HDW S280 Viewfinder WRR 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit DWR S0
41. a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is identified on Specifications page of the Operating Instructions supplied with the device or near its i LINK connector 1 When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed the actual data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i LINK connectors What is Mbps Mega bits per second A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second In case of 100 Mbps 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second i LINK operation with your camcorder For details on operation when other equipment with i LINK HDV or DV connector is connected see page 177 For details on connection with i LINK cable and necessary software refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the connected device About the required i LINK cable Use the Sony 6 pin to 4 pin or 6 pin to 6 pin i LINK cable to connect the i LINK devices i LINK and are trademarks MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG 4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR i ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG 4 VISUAL STANDARD MPEG 4 VIDEO AND OR ii DECODING MPEG 4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG 4 VIDEO NO
42. adjustment method selection switch Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 3 and 4 AUTO Automatic adjustment MANUAL Manual adjustment E ESSENCE MARK button By pressing this button when a thumbnail display is on the screen you can view the following thumbnail displays of the essence marked frames of the selected clip depending on the item selected in a list displayed on the screen All Thumbnail display of all frames marked with essence marks Rec Start in UDF mode Thumbnail display of frames marked with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of clips when the first frames are not marked with Rec Start marks Shot Mark1 Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 1 Shot Mark2 Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 2 You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 23 MGIAJ8AO Ja deyD 24 If you have recorded clips by using planning metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 the defined names are displayed instead of the above item names in the list EJ SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch Selects the type of timecode to record PRESET Record new timecode on the media REGEN Record timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the media Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R
43. among 3200K 4300K 5600K and 6300K on OPERATION gt Assignable SW in the setup menu You can also assign color temperatures to the ASSIGN 1 3 switches or ASSIGNABLE 4 5 switches Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance suas pue sluewisnfpy g Je deyo 57 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Je deyo 58 To change the color temperature when the ND filter is switched You can assign electrical CC color correction filters to ND filters see page 18 This allows you to change the color temperature automatically when the ND filter is switched Set MAINTENANCE gt White Filter gt ND Filter C Temp in the setup menu see page 149 to On 2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER selector position number 1 select ND FLT C Temp lt 1 gt To assign it to positions 2 to 4 select ND FLT C Temp lt 2 4 gt 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature As you turn the MENU knob the color temperature changes as follows 3200K gt 4300K lt gt 5600K lt gt 6300K 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required To switch between electrical CC filters with an assignable switch You can assign the function that switches between electrical CC filters to an assignable switch This allows you to switch between color temperatures 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K that have been assigned to up to four positions A to D with each press of the assignable switch Regardless of assignments to assignable sw
44. and a camera extension unit is connected These indicators also flash to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the camera operator tally indicator Viewfinder screen See Viewfinder screen display page 32 VTR SAVE indicator Do not function on this camcorder warning indicator This indicator lights when any of the following conditions occurs with the corresponding item set to On by OPERATION gt LED in the setup menu e The gain is set to other than 0 dB The SHUTTER selector is set to ON e The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST ATW is enabled e The lens extender is used e The reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the standard value The FILTER selector is set to other than 1 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 31 MGIAJ8AQ Ja deyD 32 Viewfinder screen display The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY switch is set to ON the items for which an ON setting was made with OPERATION gt Super Impose in the setup menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen Caution messages are indicated for three seconds when you carry out operations to change camcorder settings Adjustment execution messages
45. and the COLOR TEMP button For details see Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches page 161 To shoot in Clip Continuous Rec mode Shoot as described in Basic Operations page 76 When recording starts the Cont indication in the viewfinder changes to REC indication The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording Advanced Operations During recording or in recording standby mode when Cont indication is lit if you remove the media the battery or the power source the media needs to be restored It is not possible to restore media on a device other than this camcorder Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode see page 86 and then remove the media When Cont indication is flashing at 1 flash s you can remove the media To stop shooting Stop the recording Stop the recording after the recording continues for two or more seconds To exit Clip Continuous Rec mode With the camcorder in recording standby mode set OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Clip Continuous Rec in the setup menu to Off Limitations during recording A single continuous clip cannot be created if you perform one of the following operations while the camcorder is in recording or recording standby mode A new clip will be created when you next start recording e Operate on a clip lock delete or rename a clip e Change the recording form
46. appears during execution and changes to Done when the adjustment finishes Adjustment values are saved to memory automatically During the black balance adjustment the iris is automatically closed During the black balance adjustment the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a fault Output from the i LINK connector stops temporarily if you execute black balance adjustment during i LINK output Output from the connector resumes when black balance adjustment finishes If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen Possible messages are listed below Error message Meaning NG Iris Not The lens iris did not close Closed adjustment was impossible NG Timeout Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts NG Out of The difference between the Range reference value and the current value is so great that it exceeds the range Adjustment was impossible If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector it
47. are displayed as the recording proceeds Shutter Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode For details see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 59 Audio level meters Indicate the audio levels of channel 1 and channel 2 Remaining media capacity The available time for recording with the current video format recording bit rate is calculated according to the remaining space of each media and indicated in time units of minutes A lock icon appears if the media is write protected Histogram when the CBK VF01 is used Shows a pixel distribution of video luminance in HD mode only Iris position when the lens is mounted Indicates the iris position and the setting for iris override reference value for the lens iris see page 61 The iris override setting is indicated by four segments indicator as follows Reference Indicator value 0 25 Lower left segment is lit in grey 0 5 Left two segments are lit in grey 0 75 E Left two segments and lower NE right segment are lit in grey 1 ME All segments are lit in grey an 0 25 Lower left segment is lit in O white 0 5 O Left two segments are lit in O white 0 75 Li Left two segments and lower oO right segment are lit in white 1 OO All segments are lit in white OO Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Preparing a Power Supply For safety use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors
48. before proceeding to step 2 For details see To assign names to files page 167 2 Select Scene Store Mem gt Excute if you want to save the data in the camcorder s internal memory or select Scene Store SxS gt Execute if you want to save the data on an SxS memory card 3 Press the MENU knob A list box of scene files appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers 4 Select the file number under which you want to save the data and then press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the save select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the save select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you selected Scene Store SxS gt Execute in step 2 the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section when you execute the save When the data has been saved a completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select Scene Store USB gt Execute in step 2 Loading Scene Files To load a scene file from an SxS memory card insert the SxS memory card into a memory card slot and then proceed as follows See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Select FILE gt Scene in the setup menu 2 Select Scene Recall Mem gt Execute if
49. button Press to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the lens SHUTTER selector Set to ON to use the electronic shutter Push to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting When this switch is operated the new Setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 17 MGIAJ8AQ Ja deyD 18 For details see Setting the Electronic Shutter page 59 FILTER selector Switches between four ND filters built into this camcorder When this selector is used the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds FILTER selector ND filter setting 1 CLEAR 2 14 ND attenuates light to approximately U 3 I 6 ND attenuates light to approximately 116 4 64 ND attenuates light to approximately 154 You can change a MAINTENANCE menu setting so that different white balance settings can be stored for different FILTER selector positions This allows you to automatically obtain optimum white balance for the current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter selection For details see Adjusting the White Balance page 57 ZJ MENU knob Changes the item selection or a setting within the menu see page 111 AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch Activates the automatic white black balance adjustment
50. clip and record its proxy data 1 Set MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Memory Rec in the setup menu to Enable Recording Proxy Data 2 Connect a USB flash drive formatted with the FAT32 file system to the external device connector see page 75 3 Insert an SxS memory card with recorded clips 4 Cue up the clip for which you want to record proxy data 5 Select MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Copy Current Clip in the setup menu and press the MENU knob 6 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Recording of the proxy data starts The message Copy Current Clip Done appears when recording finishes Deleting All Proxy Data from a USB Flash Drive You can delete all proxy data in the MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC folder by deleting the folder 1 Set MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Memory Rec in the setup menu to Enable 2 Connect a USB flash drive containing proxy data to the external device connector 3 Select MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Del All Memory Clips in the setup menu and press the MENU knob 4 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Deletion of the folder starts The message Delete All Clips Done appears when the deletion finishes Planning Metadata Operations Planning metadata is information about shooting and recording plans recorded in an XML file lt xmlspversion 1 0 spencoding UTF 8 gt lt PlanningMetadata xmlns http xmlns sony net pro met
51. connection that can be recorded on the camcorder is HDV streams only You cannot record DV streams via the i LINK connection Recording the Camera Picture on an External Device The picture being shot with this camcorder is output as an HDV or DV stream via the i LINK HDV DV connector It can be recorded on a connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in synchronization with a recording start stop operation on this camcorder Perform the preparatory settings of the camcorder Set OPERATION gt lnput Output gt Output amp i LINK in the setup menu see page 116 to HD amp HDV or SD amp HDV HD amp HDV or SD amp HDV To output an HDV stream in HD mode when the video format is set to an HDV compatible format SP 1440 59 94i SP 1440 50i or SP 1440 23 94P SD amp DV To output a DV stream Set OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK T O in the setup menu to Enable Set MAINTENANCE gt Trigger Mode gt i LINK Trigger Mode in the setup menu see page 152 to Both or External Both To perform recording both on the memory card in this camcorder and on the external device External To perform recording only on the external device 2 Set the external device to recording standby status For operations of the external device refer to the operation manual of that device 3 Start recording The external device starts recording in synchronization The status of the external device is displayed in t
52. control speed speed of reaction to changes in the video Larger values specify quicker reaction times Clip High Light On Off Turns on or off the function that disregards highlights and forces a flatter reaction to high luminance Genlock Makes settings related to genlock Genlock On Off Turns the genlock function on or off H Phase HD 999 to 0 to 999 Specifies the H phase of HD output when genlock is enabled H Phase SD 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies the H phase of SD output when genlock is enabled Reference Internal Genlock Displays the type of reference signal used by the camcorder Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 151 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 se deyo 152 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description ND Comp ND Offset Adjust On Off ND filter color compensation Makes settings related function to ND filter color Clear ND Offset Execute Cancel Clears ND filter color compensation compensation Although the values execute by selecting differences are very Execute slight each of the built in ND filters has different color characteristics When you switch between ND filters the white balance may be disturbed You can correct for these slight color differences automatically by registering compensation values for each filter Lens Auto FB Adjust Execute Cancel Executes au
53. easily find them with the essence mark thumbnail screen The essence mark thumbnail screen displays a thumbnail of each essence mark frame in the clip To display the essence mark thumbnail screen press the ESSENCE MARK button see page 23 or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu See Displaying the Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen page 107 for more information about the essence mark thumbnail screen Clip Playback suonesedo dio G 13 dey9 97 suoiesado dio G J8 dBUJ 98 Thumbnail Operations You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to perform various operations on clips to check clip properties and to change clip metadata THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration Menu items Sub items Description Clip Properties Displays detailed properties see page 102 Set Index Picture UDF FAT HD Changes index pictures in the expand thumbnail screen or the essence mark thumbnail screen see page 108 Thumbnail View Forward Expansion e Displays the expand thumbnail screen see page 106 In the expand thumbnail screen increases the number of divisions see page 107 Back Expansion In the expand thumbnail screen decreases the number of divisions UDF I FAT HD Essence Mark Thumbnail Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen see page 107
54. eel F Format Media HD SD Input Output HD System Line LCD Rec Function gt gt Super impose System Frequency 59 941 gt gt Rec Format HQ 1920 2 Turn the MENU knob to select UDF or FAT and press the knob A confirmation message appears 3 Select Execute to execute or select Cancel to cancel and then press the MENU knob 4 Power the camcorder off and on again Changing the Video Format Refer to the above table and change the settings of the relevant items 1 Select OPERATION gt Format in the setup menu see page 114 OPERATION uho M kz Cu File System UDF Op Format Media HD SD HD Pa Input Output HD System Line 1080 Rec Format HQ 1920 gt gt Th Super impose System Frequency 59 94 gt gt Maf LCD i Rec Function 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the item to change and press the knob Turn the MENU knob to change the setting and press the knob A confirmation message appears Select Execute to execute or select Cancel to cancel and then press the MENU knob When the setting of HD SD or Country was changed power the camcorder off and on again Setting the Video Format suas pue sjuswjsnipy g Je deyo 55 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Jejdeu9 56 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adju
55. file Duration This is the duration of the selected partial file To increase the number of divisions When you press the DISP SEL EXPAND button or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Forward Expansion the divided clip or file is further divided into 12 equally sized blocks a clip or file that has been divided into 12 is further divided into 12 for 12 x 12 144 divisions You can repeat the same operation to increase the number of division To return to the previous division level Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button with the SHIFT button held down or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Back Expansion The expand thumbnail screen returns to the previous division level Displaying the Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen UDF FAT HD In the essence mark thumbnail screen shown only in HD mode you can search for shot marks in clips see page 97 change index pictures see page 108 and add and delete shot marks see page 108 1 In the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of a clip and press the ESSENCE MARK button see page 23 or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Essence Mark Thumbnail The essence mark thumbnail screen appears and a selection list is displayed 2 Select the type of the essence mark thumbnail screen All Display all frames marked with essence marks Rec Start Display frames marked with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of clips when the first frame
56. frames creates a clip and switches to the other media Genlock is not possible If power is lost during recording If you set the camcorder s POWER switch to OFF the camcorder is powered off automatically after a few seconds during which the media is accessed to record the video and audio data stored in the camcorder s memory up to that point If power is lost because the battery was removed the DC power cord was disconnected or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor side then the video and audio data shot up to that point may be lost maximum 10 seconds Be careful to avoid this when exchanging the battery Shooting with Slow amp Quick Motion When the camcorder is in HD mode and the video format see page 53 is set to one of the formats listed below you can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate Advanced Operations OPERATION gt Format menu Video format settings Country File HD System System Line NTSC UDF 1080 HD422 50 29 97P Area or HD422 50 23 98P NTSC J 1080 HD420 Area HQ 1920 29 97P HD420 HQ 1920 23 98P 720 HD422 50 59 94P HD422 50 29 97P HD422 50 23 98P FAT 1080 HQ 1920 29 97P HQ 1920 23 98P 720 HQ 1280 59 94P HQ 1280 29 97P HQ 1280 23 98P PAL UDF 1080 HD422 50 25P Area 1080 HD420 HQ 1920 25P 720 HD422 50 25P HD422 50 50P FAT 1080 HQ 1920 25P 720 HQ 1280 50P HQ 1280 25P By shooting with a frame rate
57. function properly Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder s VF connector If the coupling is loose noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly For more information about the connection of the viewfinder and camcorder contact a Sony service representative 1 Loosen the viewfinder left to right positioning ring attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe and tighten the viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Stopper 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector 20 pin VF connector 20 pin Detaching the viewfinder You can carry out this by following the attaching procedure in reverse order but there is an additional action to take when detaching the viewfinder from the fitting shoe pull up the stopper Adjusting the Viewfinder Position To adjust the viewfinder left right position loosen the left right positioning ring and to adjust the front back position loosen the front to back positioning knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder front to back positioning knob SUONEJIEdSId Z 19 dBUD Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket By fitting an optional BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder 1 Loosen the fro
58. is assigned to the RET button on the lens you can also conduct a review by using the RET button 12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 to continue recording With each repetition another clip is created on the memory card Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 REC REC REC REC REC REC START STOP START STOP START STOP You cannot resume recording for about one second after stopping recording The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on one memory card is 600 Even if the memory card has enough free capacity to record more clips when 600 clips have been recorded no further recording is possible Clip file sizes Clip file sizes vary according to file formats File File size Clip size format MP4 Less than 4 GB Less than half an hour AVI Less than 2 GB Less than 9 minutes and 30 seconds MXF Less than 43 GB Less than 6 hours If you continue recording for an extended period recorded materials may be segmented into multiple files depending on the file size the maximum number of partitions is 99 The camcorder regards continuous recording as one clip even if it has been segmented into multiple files Clip names Eight character clips names consisting of a four character prefix and a four digit number are generated automatically for clips recorded by this camcorder Example ABCD0001 You can also use OPERATION gt Clip gt Title Prefix see page 130 in the setup menu to set the clip name pref
59. is no Insert the readable media media that contains the file you want e The specified file does not exist on the media When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select All Load USB gt Execute in step 2 Resetting a File after Changing Its Contents See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations T Select FILE gt All in the setup menu 2 Select All Preset and then press the MENU knob 3 To execute the reset select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the reset select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you choose to execute the reset all settings in the ALL file are reset to preset values Saving and Loading Scene Files Saving and Loading Scene Files Scene files allow you to save the following types of data e Values set in the PAINT menu e Shutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS mode e White balance data The data that is saved and loaded depends on the setting of FILE gt Reference gt Scene White Data in the setup menu Saving Scene Files To save a scene file to an SxS memory card insert the card into a memory card slot and then proceed as follows See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Select FILE gt Scene in the setup menu To assign a name to the data before saving it Assign a name
60. is required TKIP Apply TKIP Temporal Key This item is Integrity Protocol when disabled displayed Authentication is set to WPA in grey during or WPA2 recording and play AES Apply AES Advanced For details on Wi Fi Encryption Standard when connection refer to Authentication is set to WPA the Supplement or WPA2 supplied in the CD WEP Key Index 1 2 3 4 When Encryption is WEP selects ROM labeled the key index Manuals for Solid Input Select When Encryption is setto Selects the input format depending State Memory WEP ASCII5 on the network key or security key Camcorder ASCII13 HEX10 HEX26 When Encryption is set to TKIP or AES ASCII8 63 HEX64 ASCII5 Five characters ASCII format ASCII13 13 characters ASCII format HEX10 10 hexadecimal digits HEX26 26 hexadecimal digits ASCII8 63 8 to 63 characters ASCII 8 bit format HEX64 64 hexadecimal digits characters Key Sets the network key or security key Set Enables settings for Wi Fi Setting when Wi Fi is set to Enable execute by selecting Execute Wi Fi Status Connecting Displays Connecting while connection is being attempted Displays black squares to show the connection status by the number of squares when the camcorder is connected to a computer or a LAN When the IFU WLM3 is in use and a Wi Fi connection exists in Adhoc mode Wi Fi Status will not be displayed Menu List MAINTEN
61. necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen set to Off 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Iris Window and then press the knob 3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears and then press the knob 1 2 3 4 5 6 m e A mu The shaded parts indicate the area where light detection If you select Var the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size Set the following items with MAINTENANCE gt Auto Iris2 Item Setting Iris Var Width The width of the window Iris Var Height The height of the window Iris Var H Pos The position of the window in the horizontal direction Iris Var V Pos The position of the window in the vertical direction When you exit the menu the auto iris window selected in step 3 appears Unless you need to keep this window displayed set OPERATION gt Auto Iris gt Iris Window Indication in the setup menu to Off To counter problems with very bright highlights If the subject is too bright the iris may close too much leaving the overall image dark or the highlights may be blown out In such cases setting the highlight clip function on reduces the luminance range avoiding problems from the automatic iris correction Set OPERATION gt Auto Iris gt Clip High Light in the setup menu to On Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment sBunjes
62. off Wireless Status On Off When an optional CBK WA100 is connected this turns the signal status indicator on or off Ext Media Remain On Off When an optional CBK WA100 is connected this turns the remaining recording time indicator for the SD card inserted in the CBK WA100 on or off ALAC On Off When MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt ALAC is set to Auto in the setup menu this turns the ALAC indicator on or off If an ALAC compatible lens is not attached or if the ALAC function is disabled the ALAC indicator will not appear even when this item is set to On lt 1 gt LED c Gain lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when the gain is set to other than O dB Shutter lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when the SHUTTER selector is set to ON White Preset lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST ATW Run lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when White Setting gt White Switch lt B gt is set to ATW Extender lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when the lens extender is used Iris Override lt gt On Off Turns on or off the function to light the indicator when the reference value of auto iris adjustment is not the
63. operation mode In FAT mode Fixed to Live live mode When one of Frame Rec Interval Rec and Clip Continuous Rec modes is selected View cannot be selected For details on Live Logging functions refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder Assignable SW Assigns functions to assignable switches See Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches page 161 for more information about assigning functions lt 0 gt lt I gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt RET C Temp See page 161 Assigns function to ASSIGN 0 switch Assigns function to ASSIGN 1 switch Assigns function to ASSIGN 2 switch Assigns function to ASSIGN 3 switch Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE 4 switch Assigns function to ASSIGNABLE 5 switch Assigns function to RET button on the lens Assigns function to COLOR TEMP button Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to the ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch specifies the zoom speed Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description VF Setting Color Makes settings 99 to 0 to 99 Adjusts the density of the colors displayed in the viewfinder screen related to the viewfinder screen Mode Color B amp W Selects the display mode of the viewfinder Color Color B amp W Monochrome Peaking Ty
64. provoquer une baisse de l acuit auditive Pour utiliser ce produit en toute s curit vitez I coute prolong e a des pressions sonores excessi Pour les clients au Canada Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Pour les clients en Europe Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme a la Directive sur la compatibilit lectromagn tique EMC mise par la Commission de la Communaut europ enne La conformit a cette directive implique la conformit aux normes europ ennes suivantes e EN55103 1 Interf rences lectromagn tiques mission e EN55103 2 Sensibilit lectromagn tique immunit Ce produit est pr vu pour tre utilis dans les environnements lectromagn tiques suivants E1 r sidentiel E2 commercial et industrie l g re E3 urbain ext rieur et E4 environnement EMC contr l ex studio de t l vision Le fabricant de ce produit est Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japon Le repr sentant autoris pour EMC et la s curit des produits est Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Allemagne Pour toute question concernant le service ou la garantie veuillez consulter les adresses indiqu es dans les documents de service ou de garantie s par s Pour les clients au Canada GARANTIE LIMIT E DE SONY Rendez vous sur http www sonybiz ca solutions Support do pou
65. pue sluewisnfpy g Je deyo 61 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Jejdeyo 62 Adjusting the Audio Level When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO the input levels of analog audio signals recorded on each channel are adjusted automatically You can also make manual adjustments Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically Target audio level for manual audio level adjustment Make adjustment using 20 dB as the target level If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive Excessive input level SC RRAIEKIKEKELEKEREREEER m LULU Target input level Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 Connectors 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector set the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to REAR To adjust both input signals set both switches to REAR Adjusting the Audio Level Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es corresponding to the channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 With the LEVEL knob s for the channel s selected in step 1 adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Gorrespondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On MAINTENANCE gt Audio in the setup menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio rec
66. remaining xt oY Sent Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module Q D The battery of the Recording stops Stop operation to change the battery 3 connected HDD is 5 exhausted Recording z cannot be performed WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining z a Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module There is not enough Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one capacity for copying disallowing copy WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining 3 i EJ Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module hq The card has already Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one E ten clips having the disallowing copy same name as that you tried to duplicate WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Z SE 5 Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module There is not enough Recording continues capacity for dividing a disallowing divide clip WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module Will switch to other Recording continues Make sure that a memory card is loaded in the slot soon other slot Operation Warnings 187 soueuajuley 6 Ja deuD 188 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining E z m a D Problem Operat
67. stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack you can hear the audio in stereo Under MAINTENANCE gt Audio in the setup menu Headphone Out must be set to STEREO ASSIGN assignable 0 switch You can assign the desired function to this switch on OPERATION gt Assignable SW in the setup menu see page 162 Off is assigned to this switch when the camcorder is shipped from the factory This is a momentary type switch Each press of the switch turns the function assigned to this switch on or off M8IAJ8AO Je deuD GAIN selector Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting The gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected on OPERATION gt Gain Switch in the setup menu see page 122 The factory settings are L 0 dB M 6 dB and H 12 dB When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds EJ OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch Switches the video signal output from the camera module between the following two BARS Output the color bar signal CAM Output the video signal being shot When this is selected you can switch DCC D on and off 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost det
68. tag that contain the clip name strings The shaded fields in the example are clip name strings Typhoon is described in ASCII format up to 44 characters Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo is described in UTF 8 format up to 44 bytes sp indicates a space and indicates a carriage return lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt 4 lt PlanningMetadata xmIns http xmlns sony net pro metadata planningmetadata assignId P0001 creationDate 201 1 08 20T17 00 00 09 00 p lastUpdate 2011 09 28T10 30 00 09 00 sp version 1 00 gt 4 lt Propertiessypropertyld s assignment update 201 1 09 28T10 30 00 09 00 p modifiedBy Chris gt 4 lt Title pusAscii IBYPHGGHf xml lang en gt MQYBKOGRESKARESZNOKYG lt Title gt lt Properties gt lt lt PlanningMetadata gt 4 When you create a file enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line and do not enter spaces except where specified e Up to 44 bytes or characters string is available for the clip name If the UTF 8 format string exceeds 44 bytes 44 bytes string is used as the clip name If only ASCII format name is specified 44 characters string is used as the clip name When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF 8 format name string can be used the standard format clip name is used You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add in application software supplied with the CBK WAO
69. that differs from the playback frame rate you can obtain slow and quick motion effects that are smoother than low speed or high speed playback of content recorded at the normal frame rate Example When the video format is HQ 1280 23 98P you can obtain quick motion effects by setting the frame rate to 1 to 23 and obtain slow motion effects by setting the frame rate to 25 to 60 Slow amp Quick Motion settings and shooting The Slow amp Quick Motion function cannot be used at the same time as the picture cache Interval Rec Frame Rec or Clip Continuous Rec function When you select Slow amp Quick Motion mode the picture cache Interval Rec Frame Rec and Clip Continuous Rec functions are disabled When you select picture cache Frame Rec Interval Rec or Clip Continuous Rec mode the Slow amp Quick Motion function is disabled Slow amp Quick Motion is disabled when the slow shutter function viewfinder display SLS function is enabled The slow shutter function is disabled when the Slow amp Quick Motion function is enabled Slow amp Quick Motion is disabled when OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK I O in the setup menu is set to Enable When Slow amp Quick Motion is enabled i LINK I O is fixed as Disable Slow amp Quick Motion settings cannot be changed during recording To make Slow amp Quick Motion settings 1 Select OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Slow amp Quick in the setup menu F
70. the application software for computers Plan Name specified in planning metadata if no name is specified in planning metadata the name specified by Title Prefix is selected Menu List sBunjes payeyeaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 129 sbunies pelrejeq pue nuejy 9 Jaj deU 9 130 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Clip Title Prefix Text input Specifies the title part 4 to 46 Make settings for clip alphanumeric characters of clip titles name or clip When the currently specified title is management Do not assign clip names that begin with the period symbol Clips with names in which the first character is cannot be viewed on the application software for computers eight characters or fewer in length the entire title appears When the title is longer than eight characters the first seven characters appear and a symbol appears in place of the eighth character Displays the Character Set screen Character Set screen configuration e Character selection area three lines Select the character to insert at the title prefix cursor position _ 0123456789 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ e Cursor operation area one line Space Changes the character at the cursor position to a space INS Inserts a space at the cursor position DEL Deletes the character at the cursor position lt Moves the cursor to the left
71. the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of timecode flashes 5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN F RUN Free run The timecode generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The timecode generator runs only while recording To set the drop frame mode non drop frame mode You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on MAINTENANCE gt Timecode in the setup menu To make the timecode consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes on the media normally produces consecutive timecode However once you remove the media and record on another media the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original media again for recording In this case to make the timecode consecutive set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN Saving the real Time in the Timecode Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode When it is necessary to set the actual time use MAINTENANCE gt Clock Set gt Date Time in the setup menu For details see Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock page 43 Setting the User Bits By setting the user bits up to 8 hex
72. the iris may hunt D during the adjustment To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or S on the lens For details refer to the lens operation manual 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen Possible messages are listed below Error message Meaning The white video level is too low Either open the lens iris or increase the gain NG Low Light NG Timeout Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts The white video level is too high Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter NG High Light If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs again an internal check is necessary For information about this internal check refer to the Maintenance Manual If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST This makes it possible to automatically set the white balance to 5600K factory default value by pressing the COLOR TEMP button The color temperature to which the white balance is set when the COLOR TEMP button is pressed can be selected from
73. the knob that adjusts the audio level Side2 The LEVEL knob right on the side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Side2 Adjust with both the LEVEL knob right and the MIC LEVEL control Menu List MAINTENANCE Settings Description Sidel Front Front Sidel Selects the knob that adjusts the audio levels of a wireless microphone and a device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 connector on the rear panel Side1 The LEVEL knob left on the side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Sidel Adjust with both the LEVEL knob left and the MIC LEVEL control Menu items Sub item Audio Rearl WRR Level Makes settings related to audio Rear2 WRR Level Side2 Front Front Side2 Selects the knob that adjusts the audio levels of a wireless microphone and a device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 2 connector on the rear panel Side2 The LEVEL knob right on the side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Side2 Adjust with both the LEVEL knob right and the MIC LEVEL control Audio CH3 Level Side3 Front Front Side3 Selects the knob that adjusts the level of audio recorded on channel Side3 The LEVEL knob on side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Side3 Adjust with both the LEVEL knob and the MIC LEVEL control Audio CH4 Level Side4 Front Front Side4 Selects the knob that adju
74. then confirm the selection by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button The settings of the selected sub item appear and the cursor moves to the currently selected value OPERATION Format Format Media Input Output Super impose LCD Rec Function Settings area The settings area displays a maximum of seven lines You can scroll through menus with more than seven sub items by moving the cursor up and down Triangles appear at the upper right and lower right of the settings area to indicate that a sub item menu is scrollable For sub items with a large settings range for example 99 to 99 the settings area is not displayed Instead the sub item name is highlighted to indicate that the sub item can be set GI Turn the MENU knob or press the 4 or button to select the value to set and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button The setting is changed and the display is updated to show the new setting If you select Execute for an executable item the corresponding function is executed Items that require confirmation before execution In step 3 the menu disappears and a confirmation message appears if you select an item that requires confirmation before execution Follow the instructions in the message to execute or cancel the operation To enter text Some items such as time data or file names must be set by entering text When you select one of these items the text entry ar
75. to 0 to 99 Specifies the knee aperture level Limit 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the detail limiter values for both the white side and black side direction White Limit 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white side detail limiter value Black Limit 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies the black side detail limiter value V BLK Limit 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the black side V detail limiter value V Detail Creation NAM G R G Y Selects the source signal used to generate the V detail signal NAM A V detail signal created from the R signal or a V detail signal created from the G signal or a V detail signal created from the B signal whichever is the signal with the highest level G G signal G R Composite signal comprising the G signal and R signal in a 1 1 ratio Y Y signal Cross Color in SD mode only 99 to 0 to 99 Sets the cross color reduction level for details When Detail is set to Off or OPERATION gt Format gt Country is set to Pal Area this setting is disabled Menu List PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Aperture Makes settings related to aperture correction Aperture correction is processing to improve resolution by adding high frequency aperture signals to the video signal which corrects degeneration due to high frequency characteristics Aperture On Off Turns aperture correction on or off
76. to acquire the IP Makes settings for address automatically from a DHCP network connection server Enable or not Disable Notes IP Address 0 0 0 0 to When DHCP is set to Disable sets 255 255 255 255 the IP address The CBK WAQL 192 168 1 10 Wi Fi Adapteror Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 to When DHCP is set to Disable sets IFU WLM3 USB 255 255 255 255 the subnet mask a LAN red Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 to When DHCP is set to Disable sets sA a eee 255 255 255 255 the default gateway f ER R User Name admin Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31 disabled displayed i s alphanumeric characters in grey during recording and play Password pmw 500 model name Sets a password model name in 0 to 31 alphanumeric characters PO PRM r Set Execute Cancel Confirms the settings in Network network connection Settings execute by selecting refer to the Execute Supplement supplied MAC Add Disol he MAC add in the CD ROM ress isplays the address labeled Manuals for Net Config Reset Execute Cancel Resets the settings in Network Solid State Memory Settings to the preset values Camcorder execute by selecting Execute Wi Fi Setting Scan Networks Execute Cancel When Wi Fi is set to Enable scan Makes settings for Wi Fi connection The CBK WAO1 Wi Fi Adapter or the available network connection The connection mode will not be detected automatically when the IFU WLM3 is in use Set Network
77. to adjust the position in the front to rear direction Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the camcorder on your shoulder see page 52 LIGHT video light connector 2 pin female A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected see page 50 Lens cable clamp Clamp a lens cable MIC IN microphone input 48 V connector XLR type 5 pin female Connect a stereo microphone to this connector The power 48 V is supplied via this connector LENS connector 12 pin Connect a lens cable to this connector When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this connector power off the camcorder first Tripod mount When using the camcorder on a tripod attach the tripod adaptor optional Lens mount special bayonet mount Attach the lens Consult a Sony service representative for information about available lenses Lens locking lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position After locking the lens be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached M8IAJ8AO Je deuD Lens mount cap Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust Operating and Connectors Section Front REC START recording start
78. value saved in memory A B Gain lt A gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance B gain value saved in memory A Color Temp lt B gt 1500K to 3200K to Displays the white balance color 50000K temperature saved in memory B Color Temp BAL 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance gain lt B gt values saved in memory B linked R gain and B gain R Gain lt B gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance R gain value saved in memory B B Gain lt B gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance B gain value saved in memory B Black Master Black 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the master black level Specifies the black R Black 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the R black level leys level la B Black 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the B black level unilluminated parts of the video You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks Menu List sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 133 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuejN 9 JajdeyUD 134 PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Flare Makes settings related to flare Flare is light generated from a bright image region that spreads broadly across the image adding light to dark regions and reducing contrast It is caused by reflection inside the lens system Flare On Off Turns flare correction on or off Master Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets the master flare correction level
79. written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved k xlpueddy This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA hash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed Tf this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reprodu
80. you want to load the file from the camcorder s internal memory and select Scene Recall SxS gt Execute if you want to load the file from an SxS memory card 3 Press the MENU knob A list box of scene files appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers 4 Select the desired file number and then press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the load select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the load select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you selected Scene Recall SxS gt Execute in step 2 the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section when you execute the load When the data has been loaded a completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select Scene Recall USB gt Execute in step 2 Saving and Loading Scene Files eyeq Guqles sN Gulpeo pue Bunes Jajdeyup 169 eyeq Bum s 1esf Guipeo pue Bunes Jaydeyo 170 Saving and Loading Lens Files Setting Lens File Data Use FILE gt Lens see page 159 in the setup menu to set the data in lens files You can set the following data and save it as a lens file Setting data Sub items V modulation shading M V Modulation compensation values Lens Center H Lens Center V Center mark
81. 0 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz Video codec MPEG 2 MP H14 Video rate 25 Mbps CBR Video samples 1440 x 1080 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz DVCAM Video rate 25 Mbps Video samples 720 x 480 NTSC 576 PAL Audio LPCM 2CH 16 bits 48 kHz Recording playback time With one SBP 32 SBS 32G1A FAT mode HQ About 100 minutes SP About 140 minutes DVCAM About 130 minutes UDF mode HD422 50 IMX50 About 60 minutes HD420 HQ About 90 minutes DVCAM About 110 minutes With one SBP 64A SBS 64G1A FAT mode HQ About 200 minutes SP About 280 minutes DVCAM About 260 minutes UDF mode HD422 50 IMX50 About 120 minutes HD420 HQ About 180 minutes DVCAM About 220 minutes The actual recording playback time may differ xlpueddy slightly from the values shown here depending on usage conditions memory characteristics etc Continuous operation time With the BP L80S Approx 145 min Mass Main body only 3 4 kg 7 Ib 7 9 oz Dimensions See page 196 Supplied accessories See page 195 Camera Block Pickup device 21 type CCD image sensor Effective picture elements 1920 H x 1080 V Format 3 chip RGB Optical system F1 4 prism system ND filters 1 Clear 2 14ND 3 46ND 4 U4ND Specifications 193 xlpueddy Sensitivity F11 System frequency 59 94i F12 System frequency 50i 20001x 89 9 reflection 3200K Monaural Output 300 mW M
82. 00 23 98P 23 99 to 3700 32 02 to 3700 25P 25 00 to 3900 32 03 to 3900 System lines 720 System Shutter speed unit Hz frequency S Q Off S amp Q On 59 94P 60 07 to 4100 32 01 to 4100 50P 50 03 to 3900 32 03 to 3900 29 97P 29 99 to 4100 32 01 to 4100 23 98P 23 99 to 3700 32 02 to 3700 25P 25 00 to 3900 32 03 to 3900 SLS slow speed shutter mode Select this mode for shooting subjects in low level sBunjes pue sjuowysnipy g ls deUD Speed mode lighting conditions System Shutter speed unit seconds OPERATION gt Format Number of frequency gt HD System Line setting accumulated frames 59 941 1 60 100 120 125 gt 250 500 in the setup menu 59 94P 1 1000 2000 1080 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 50i 720 2 4 6 8 16 50P 29 97P 1407 150 60 100 7120 125 gt Notes 550 11500 11000 2000 SLS mode cannot be used when the video format is SP 25P 33 ay To ay 1 60 1400 17120 Ths 1440 23 98P or when the camcorder is in Slow amp 150 JE 14000 72000 Quick Motion mode 23 98P Va ay 148 ay T ay Tey 96 ao Itis not possible to use SLS mode when OPERATION yo 1420 125 1250 1500 1000 2000 a This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in Slow amp Quick Motion mode and OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency Angle mode 180 90 45 22 59 and 11 25 ECS Ext
83. 1 Wi Fi Adapter to define clip names For details refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK WAOI To set clip names 1 Load a planning metadata file that contains clip names into this camcorder 2 Set OPERATION gt Clip gt Auto Naming in the setup menu to Plan Each time that you record a clip the unit automatically generates a name consisting of the clip name defined in the planning metadata file with the addition of an underbar _ and a five digit serial number 00001 to 99999 Examples Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001 Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002 When you load another planning metadata file the serial number returns to 00001 with the next recording operation BuqooyS b Je deyo To select the clip name display format When names are defined in both ASCII format and UTF 8 format you can use OPERATION gt Clip gt Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to select which of the names to display on the LCD monitor and on the viewfinder screen To display ASCII format names Select Title1 ASCIN The clip name becomes Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber but Typhoon_SerialNumber is displayed on the screens To display UTF 8 format names Select Title2 UTF 8 The clip name becomes Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber and the same name is displayed on the screens Planning Metadata Operations 91 Bunooys p Je dBUD 92 Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata When you use plann
84. 100 177 Recording the Camera Picture on an External Device 177 Nonlinear Editing eeeeeoeo eee oaza 178 Recording External Input Signals e eeeosaeea aaa ea aeaawa 178 Configuring a Shooting and Recording System 2 00 001001000000000 179 Chapter 9 Maintenance Testing the Camcorder sccsccscsscsscssessescescssessesssssescescessescssssssscseesees 180 Maintenance REA 180 Cleaning the Viewfinder 180 Note about the Battery Terminal eeeeeeeeaeaa aaa wacewa 181 Operation Warnings cccsccscsrsssscsscsssssssscssscssssessscsssesesssssssessssesees 182 Error Indication eian a odd 182 Warning Indication ececesesceseeseeseesecseeseeeeceeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeenes 183 Appendix Important Notes on Operation sesesessesesossssosesosossescesosososoesosossssosessesesee 190 Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock essesesossssesosoesesosessesesee 192 Specifications c cccccssrcsssrcsscsssecsssccsscessssssscssssessessssessssessssssneseseesseses 192 General zz dE ONZ RAZA 192 Camera BIOGKE 43 a A AA innate RAGA Gil AA 193 Aydi Block 2 20 A oo O A 194 Display zzz GARE GA A O eee sees 194 Media Block zeza e AZ COCO R OG A ea NAA 194 Miputs OQutputs e OOO EO 194 Supplied Accessories eeeoee eocen 195 Recommended Additional Equipment 4 0 22421 22 195 10
85. 18 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Super Impose Super VF Display On Off Makes settings Super Menu On Off related to superimposed text and markers Super Timecode On Off When the setting of Input Output gt SDI Out Super or Video Out Super is On superimpose text information on the output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector and VIDEO OUT connector as specified On or Off for each item Super Marker On Off When the setting of Input Output gt Video Out Super is On specifies whether to superimpose markers on the output from the VIDEO OUT connector Super Rec Status On Off Indicator Selects whether to superimpose On or not impose Off the recording status indication on the following two outputs e Output from the VIDEO OUT connector with Input Output gt Video Out Super set to On e Output from the SDI connector with Input Output gt SDI Out Super set to On LCD LCD Color 99 to 0 to 99 Adjusts the LCD color LCD Marker amp Zebra On Off Turns the marker and zebra display in the LCD monitor on or off Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Rec Function Makes settings related to special recording modes Slow amp Quick On Off Turns the Slow amp Quick Motion function on or off When this is set to On the Picture Cache Rec Interval Rec and Frame Rec sub items are s
86. 1D Digital Wireless Receiver SBP 32 64A SBS 32G1A 64G1A SxS Memory Card MEAD MS01 SD02 Media Adaptor HDVF 200 20A C35W C950W C730W Viewfinder xlpueddy QDA EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adapter CBK MDO01 SD Record and Playback Key CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface _J PHu 220R Professional Harddisk Unit ETA CJ PMW 500 RM B170 B750 RCP 730 750 751 920 921 1001 1501 MSU 900 950 700 Remote Control Unit CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adapter GS VOT 141014 Tripod Adaptor D CBK HDO2 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface CA FB70 HD Camera Adaptor Tripod L LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case BP L80S i BC L70 Batter Battery Pack Charger i Charger AC DN10 DN2B BC L500 Battery AC Adaptor Charger a The carrying case is large enough to hold the camcorder with lens and microphone mounted However remove them if they protrude more than 25 cm 9 Tg inches from the front of the main unit Chart of Optional Components and Accessories 197 xipueddy 198 About i LINK This section explains the specifications and features of i LINK What is i LINK i LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate devices equipped with i LINK connectors i LINK allows your device to e Perform two way transmission and reception of data such as digital audio and digital video sig
87. 2 switch to REAR depending on which of the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 connectors is used for connecting the external audio equipment e With the XLR connection automatic detection function being on When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on or off by MAINTENANCE gt Audio gt Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu Tripod Mounting T Attach the optional VCT 14 U14 Tripod Adaptor to the tripod Tripod adaptor AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 switches To AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Audio equipment AUDIO IN selectors SUONEJEdSId Z 19 dBUD Camera mount 2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks 3 Move the camcorder forward and backward and make sure it does not detach Tripod Mounting 49 suoiesedaig z 18 1dEUD 50 To remove the camcorder from the tripod adaptor Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow Red button Lever The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed If this happens press the red button and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position If the pin remain
88. 327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents For the customers in the U S A SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http www sony com psa warranty for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product For the customers in Canada SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http www sonybiz ca solutions Support do for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product For the customers in Europe Sony Professional Solutions Europe Standard Warranty and Exceptions on Standard Warranty Please visit http www pro sony eu warranty for important information and complete terms and conditions For the customers in Korea SONY LIMITED WARRANTY Please visit http bpeng sony co kr handler BPAS Start for important information and complete terms and conditions of Sony s limited warranty applicable to this product AVERTISSEMENT Afin de r duire les risques d incendie ou d lectrocution ne pas exposer cet appareil a la pluie ou a Fhumidit Afin d carter tout risque d lectrocution garder le coffret ferm Ne confier Fentretien de I appareil qu a un personnel qualifi AVERTISSEMENT Une pression acoustique excessive en provenance des couteurs ou du casque peut
89. 4 If you continue recording the message Media Full appears and recording stops when the total remaining recording time falls to 0 About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory card The display of remaining recording time changes to 0 and the message Media Full appears when the clip limit is reached Restoring SxS Memory Cards If for any reason an error should occur in a memory card the card must be restored before use When you load an SxS memory card that needs to be restored a message appears in the viewfinder to ask whether you want to restore it To restore a card Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob The restoration starts During the restoration a execution message appears the progress is displayed and the ACCESS lamp lights in orange When the restoration finishes a completion message is displayed for three seconds If restoration fails Write protected SxS memory cards and cards on which memory errors have occurred cannot be restored A warning message appears for such cards Follow the instructions in the message and unprotect the card or replace it with another card SxS memory cards on which memory errors have occurred may become usable if they are reformatted In some cases some clips can be restored while others cannot The restored clips can be played normally If the message Could not Restore Some Clips keeps appearing
90. 6 29 30 TC IN connector 26 TC OUT connector 26 Testing 180 THUMBNAIL button 23 THUMBNAIL indicator 23 THUMBNAIL menu 98 operations 100 Thumbnail screen 93 displaying OK clip thumbnails only 100 displaying the all clips thumbnail 101 Thumbnail s changing the screen type 100 operations 98 Time setting 43 Timecode 35 setting 64 synchronizing 65 TLCS automatic adjustment 61 TLCS control mode 34 Tripod mount 17 Tripod mounting 49 Index U UHF portable tuner attaching 47 USB flash drive 75 formatting 75 User bits setting 65 User file s 166 171 User setting data loading 167 saving 166 V Video format 103 setting 53 Video level indication 35 Video light connecting 50 VIDEO OUT connector 26 Viewfinder 30 adjusting focus 41 adjusting position 39 adjusting screen 41 attaching 38 cable 31 cleaning 180 connectors 16 detaching eyepiece 40 fitting shoe 16 HDVF 20A optional 29 positioning knob 17 positioning lever 16 positioning ring 16 screen 31 screen display 32 status display 31 Viewfinder cable 30 Voltage capacity 33 VTR SAVE indicator 31 w WARNING indicator 21 Warnings 182 WHITE BAL switch 19 White balance memory 35 White balance adjusting 57 Wi Fi adapter 25 Wireless microphone reception level 33 Write protect 71 Z ZEBRA switch 29 30 Zoom position 32 xepul Index 207 xepul 208 Index xepul Index 209 xepul 210 Index The material contained in this m
91. 9 Specifies a SAW black shading POPLECHORY correction value for the horizontal direction R G B Black H Para 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a parabola black shading correction value for the horizontal direction R G B Black V Saw 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a SAW black shading correction value for the vertical direction R G B Black V Para 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a parabola black shading correction value for the vertical direction Black Saw Para On Off Turns the black shading SAW and parabola correction functions on or off Master Black 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the master black level Master Gain TMP 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies a temporary master gain 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB value 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB Battery Info Before End 5 10 15 95 Specifies a threshold value that Makes settings related 100 triggers a Battery Near End to batteries warning when a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is used Info End 0 1 2 3 4 5 Specifies a threshold value that triggers a Battery End warning when a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is used Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 139 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 140 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Battery Sony Before End 11 5V to 17V 0 1V step Specifies a threshold value that Makes settings related triggers a Battery Near End to batteries warning when a BP L60S L80S battery pack is used Sony End 11 0V
92. ANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Wi Fi Setting Wireless Mode 802 11b 802 11g 802 11n Displays an IEEE802 11 standard Makes settings for Wi Fi connection mg When the IFU WLM3 is in use and Notes a Wi Fi connection exists in Adhoc The CBK WAO1 mode Wireless Mode will not be Wi Fi Adapter or displayed IFU WLM3 USB Wi Fi Enable Disable Selects whether to enable or disable Wireless LAN Wi Fi connection module is required Wi Fi Remote On Off Select On when using the Wi Fi This item is remote commander disabled displayed in grey during Note recording and play Unselectable when Wi Fi is set to For details on Wi Fi Disable connection refer to the Supplement supplied in the CDs ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder Clock Set Date Time Sets the current date and time Sets the internal clock 12H 24H 12H 24H Selects the 12 hour format 12H or the 24 hour format 24H for display of times Date Mode YYMMDD MMDDYY Selects the display format for dates DDMMYY YYMMDD Year Month Day MMDDYY Month Day Year DDMMYY Day Month Year Language Language English Chinese Selects the language for messages Selects the language for from English or Chinese messages Hours Meter Hours Sys Displays the cumulative hours of Makes settings related use cannot be reset to the digital hours Hours Reset Displays the hours o
93. Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations T Select FILE gt All in the setup menu 2 Select All Load SxS gt Execute A list box of ALL files appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers File numbers with a file name or a date and time are the number of files that already contain data 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired file number 4 Press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the load select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the load select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you choose to execute the load the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section The ACCESS lamp goes out and a completion message appears when the data has been loaded When loading files from one device to another if the firmware versions on the two devices do not match the setting values for functions that are not supported on the destination device will be set to preset values Saving and Loading Settings eyeq Guqles sN Gulpeo pue Bunes Jajdeup 167 eea Humes 1esf Guipeo pue Bunes 7 Jaydeyo 168 If an error message appears One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the load or as soon as you select Execute In this case the file is not loaded from the SxS memory card Error message Problem What to do NG No Data e There
94. C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com xlpueddy About Bitmap Fonts This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts produced and sold by Ricoh Company Ltd MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License About Bitmap Fonts 199 xlpueddy 200 About OpenSSL Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit this product uses software developed by the OpenSSL Project http www openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
95. CD Both Off Specifies the Rec Status Indicator display position Viewfinder Only in the viewfinder LCD Only on the LCD monitor Both In the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor Off Do not display MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Preset White Color Temp lt P gt 1500K to 3200K to Specifies the white balance preset Makes settings related 50000K value to white balance preset Color Temp 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies finer color temperature valuga Balance lt P gt settings for use when satisfactory video cannot be obtained with Color Temp lt P gt R Gain lt P gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the R gain preset value B Gain lt P gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the B gain preset value AWB Enable lt P gt On Off Turns on and off execution of the AWB auto white balance function when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST White Filter ND Filter On Off Turns the function that assigns Makes settings related C Temp electrical CC filters to ND filters on to filters or off ND FLT 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for C Temp lt 1 gt 6300K when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters ND FLT 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for C Temp lt 2 4 gt 6300K when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters Electrical 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for CC lt A gt 6300K when the electrical CC filter switching funct
96. Clip name Number of components The number after the clip name delimited by is the number of components This appears only for clips larger than 2 GB in size which have been split into smaller files for storage suoiesado dijo G sajdeyo Video format of recording File format Indicates the file format of the selected clip AVD Clip duration Timecode This is the timecode of the index picture To switch between SxS memory cards When two SxS memory cards are loaded you can switch between them by pressing the SLOT SELECT button While an expand thumbnail screen see page 106 or an essence mark thumbnail screen see page 107 is displayed SxS memory cards cannot be switched Clip Playback 95 suoneiado dijo G lJ8 dEUJ 96 To hide the thumbnail screen Press the THUMBNAIL button Playing Clips To select clip thumbnails Do one of the following to move the yellow cursor to the clip that you want to select e Press an arrow button 0 4 lt gt e Turn the MENU knob e Press the PREV or NEXT button To select the first thumbnail With the F REV button held down press the PREV button To select the last thumbnail With the F FWD button held down press the NEXT button To play clips sequentially starting from a selected clip T Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to play first 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button Play begins from the top of the selected clip Play co
97. Contains only User Menu Only as sub item You can change the configuration of the USER menu by adding desired menu items and arranging them in a desired order For details refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder Menu List sBunles pelrejaq pue nue 9 seydeup 5 113 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 114 OPERATION Menu Settings in bold are the factory default values OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Format File System UDF FAT Switches between UDF and FAT as the Specifies the recording mode execute by selecting camcorder s Execute recording mode HDISD HD SD Switches between HD or SD as the operating mode and 3 d by select recording format operating mode execute by selecting Execute When the optional CBK MDOI is not installed SD cannot be selected SD recording is not allowed HD System Line 1080 720 When the operating mode is HD sets the number of system lines to 1080 or 720 execute by selecting Execute System Frequency The available settings vary depending on the settings in HD SD HD System Line and Country Selects the system frequency execute by selecting Execute 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P When the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 1080 and the Country setting is other than PAL Area 50i 25P e When the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setti
98. Eyepiece eueea oaza 40 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen 111 11 41 Setting the Area of Use sscsssscssesssscssssssesssscsessesssssssesssceseesessesesseses 42 Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock csscssssssscsssessssssseseees 43 Mounting and Adjusting the Lens 2001200 0s00000000000o000000000000000000 43 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 44 Preparing the Audio Input System scsscsssssssseseees 45 Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector 45 Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors 46 6 Table of Contents Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone Syste err W Odc Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment Tripod Mounting csccscsscsscsscsccscescessssssccssssesseesessessccseesessscssessessessess 49 Connecting a Video Light cccsccsssscssessescsscessessecsscessesessesseesessesseees 50 Using the Shoulder Strap scscsccsscssssssssssccsecsecsscsscssessessessessessessesseee 51 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position sccscsssssssssssscsecsscesesserscesere 52 Chapter 3 Adjustments and Settings Setting the Video Format ccssscsssssssssssesssssscsssssesssscsssssssssessesseseses 53 Selecting the Recording Mode wu ee ecseeseseeeseeeeseesenetseeeeseeeens 55 Changing the Video Format
99. For Customer in China mare maaange raw foa LRH KERER aA MTHS 109 SONY K AR SAB PAULI SKU PE http pro sony com cn SOLID STATE MEMORY CAMCORDER PMW 500 OOS MINNd HAHGHOOWVO AHOWAW ALVLS dI10S The supplied CD ROM includes operation manuals for the PMW 500 Solid State Memory Camcorder English Japanese French German Italian Spanish and Chinese versions in PDF format For more details see Using the CD ROM manual on page 15 HARA HA 20134210 XDCAM Power HAD FX SxS CINEAILTA PMW 500 Sony Corporation AU OPERATION MANUAL Before operating the unit please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only Important Safety Instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appara
100. HDVF 200 20A C35W C950W C730W CBK VFO1 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket BKW 401 xlpueddy Equipment for remote control Remote Control Unit RM B170 B750 RCP 1000 1001 1500 1501 1530 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface CBK HD02 VF 26 pin rectangular 20 pin round HD Camera Adaptor For wireless receiver D sub 15 pin 2 CA FB70 when an optional CBK HD02 is installed Supplied Accessories HD Camera Control Unit CA TX70 Shoulder strap 1 MPEG TS Adaptor Cold shoe kit 1 set HDCA 702 when an optional CBK HD02 is Lens mount cap 1 installed Flange back adjustment chart Wi Fi Adapter OPERATION MANUAL CBK WAO01 Japanese version 1 USB Wireless LAN module English version 1 IFU WLM3 CD ROM Wireless Adapter Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder CBK WA100 PDF OPERATION MANUAL and SUPPLEMENT 1 Specifications 195 xlpueddy 196 Media Adaptor MEAD MS0OI for Memory Stick MEAD SD02 for SDHC card XQD ExpressCard Adapter QDA EX1 for XQD memory card Media SxS Memory Card SxS PRO SBP 32 32 GB SxS PRO SBP 64A 64 GB SxS 1 SBS 32G1A 32 GB SxS 1 SBS 64G1A 64 GB Professional Harddisk Unit PHU 220R in FAT mode Audio equipment Microphone ECM 678 674 673 680S Microphone Holder CAC 12 Wireless Microphone DWR S01D WRR 855S 860C 86 1 862 Other peripheral devices Tripod adaptor VCT 14 U14
101. IL gt Lock All Clips Thumbnail Operations A confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob AII clips are protected To cancel protection of a clip 1 m the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip which you want to unprotect and select THUMBNAIL gt Unlock Clip The screen changes to the clip properties screen and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The selected clip is unprotected To cancel protection of all clips 1 In the thumbnail screen select THUMBNAIL gt Unlock All Clip A confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob AII clips are unprotected Copying Clips You can copy clips to other SxS memory cards Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards using the same names as the original clips Ifa clip with the same name already exists at the copy destination SxS memory card a one digit number in parentheses is added to the original name The number in parentheses is the smallest number that does not exist at the copy destination Examples ABCD0002 ABCD0002 1 ABCD0002 1 ABCD0002 2 ABCD0005 3 ABCD0005 4 If the parenthetical numbers 1 to 9 already exist at the copy destination it is not possible to copy any more clips under that name A tenth clip cannot be copied A message appe
102. KP Marks 11 111 1 103 Table of Contents Protecting Clps7is 23 3 is Rect eee eect OO es Copying Clips Deleting Clips eeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeees Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen 112111111 106 Displaying the Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen 107 Adding and Deleting Shot Marks eeeeaea eee ace ananwa 108 Changing Clip Index Pictures e eeoeeee aaa 108 Dividing CUPS eei ikerin AE AO A oes th ee tenet NA 108 Chapter 6 Menu and Detailed Settings Setup Menu Organization and Levells sssssssssscssssssssscssscssseesseees 109 Setup Menu Organization ae Setup Menu Levels oco A aria Basic Setup Menu Operations cscscsscessesssssssssessessessescescssesseseeseeee Meni B i OEA dA JOJO W USER Menu Factory Default Configuration OPERATION Menu 2 121 2121 PAINTEMENUG 5 20 o ATE MAINTENANCE M nu dennan nna a a eah FIEE MEM n ae a e a e e Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches s eseseseseseseseseosseosoeceososose Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 0 Switch 161 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 2 Switch 162 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 1 and 3 Switches the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches and the COLOR TEMP IDILE EO DARASE R E T R ch cours sented iwo 162 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the
103. LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA LLC SEE HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM MPEG LA is offering licenses for i manufacturing sales of any storage media storing MPEG 4 Visual video information ii distribution broadcasting of MPEG 4 Visual video information in any manner such as online video distribution service internet broadcasting TV broadcasting Other usage of this product may be required to obtain license from MPEGLA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 http www mpegla com MPEG 2 Video Patent Portfolio License ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA L L C 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 PACKAGED MEDIA means any storage media storing MPEG 2 video information such as DVD movie which are sold distributed to general consumers Disc replicators or sellers of the PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for their own business from MPEG LA Please contact MPEG LA for any further information MPEG LA L L
104. RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Record timecode synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 audio channel 1 2 adjustment method selection switches Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels I and 2 AUTO Automatic adjustment MANUAL Manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 audio channel 1 2 3 4 input selection switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 2 3 and 4 FRONT Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors WIRELESS Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner if it is installed Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Left side and upper section SDIIN OPTION ASSIGNABLE 4 5 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on OPERATION gt Assignable SW in the setup menu see page 162 Off is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory PC connector Used to put this camcorder into USB connection mode and use it as an external storage device for a computer When a computer without ExpressCard slot is connected to this connector every memory card inserted in the camcorder is recognized as a drive for that computer
105. S A Telephone Number 858 942 2230 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation For the State of California USA only Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Perchlorate Material Lithium battery contains perchlorate For the customers in Taiwan only Vee eas EIK jm For the customers in Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards e EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission e EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environments E1 residential E2 commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70
106. S memory card select button When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card slots A and B press this button to select the card you want to use see page 72 M8IAJ8AO JE deUuD EJ SDI IN OPTION SDI input optional connector BNC type When the optional CBK HDO2 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed the camcorder can record HDSDI or SDSDI signals input to this connector GENLOCK IN genlock signal input connector BNC type This connector inputs a reference signal when the camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment Available reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table System frequency Available reference signals 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 29 97P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 23 98P PsF 1080 23 98PsF 480 59 94i output 1080 23 98P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i Pulldown output 720 59 94P 1080 59 94i 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 720 29 97P 1080 59 94i 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 720 23 98P 1080 59 94i 720 59 94P 480 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 480 29 97P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 50i 1080 50i 576 50i 1080 25P 1080 50i 576 50i 720 50P 1080 50i 720 50P 576 50i 720 25P 1080 50i 720 50P 576 S0i 576 50i 1080 50i 576 50i 576 25P 1080 50i 576 50i Genlock for the camera module supports horizontal sync sign
107. SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears When all modes and speeds are displayed the display changes in the following order Speed Mode with system frequency 59 94i 1 60 gt 1 100 gt gt 1 10001 2000 ECS Mode Depending on the frame rate setting see page 85 some shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow amp Quick Motion mode These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable shutter speed Example If you perform Slow amp Quick Motion shooting when setting the frame rate to 60 and the video format to HQ1280 29 97P The shutter speed is indicated as follows When Slow Quick Motion mode is off 1 40 1 50 1 60 1 100 When Slow amp Quick Motion mode is on 1 60 1 60 1 60 1 100 Setting the Electronic Shutter To set the shutter speed in ECS mode 1 Set the shutter mode to ECS see the previous item 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired frequency or number of frames To set the shutter speed in SLS mode Set OPERATION gt Shutter gt Slow Shutter in the setup menu to On see page 128 2 Select the desired number of accumulated frames with OPERATION gt Shutter gt SLS Frames in the setup menu Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent bl
108. T Green tally indicator Lights when the camcorder is the following states e Picture Cache mode enabled Green tally signal received when a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a camera extension unit is connected Recording with MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt HD SDI Remote I F in the setup menu set to G Tally Flashes when the camcorder is the following states e Set to Interval Rec mode or the consecutive mode of Frame Rec mode 1 flash per second Recording in Interval Rec mode or recording in the consecutive mode of Frame Rec mode 4 flashes per second Set to the single shot mode of Frame Rec mode or recording in that mode 2 flashes per second BATT battery indicator This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to the camcorder is nearly exhausted and stays lit when the battery is completely exhausted To prevent interruption during operation replace the battery as soon as this indicator starts flashing The battery power level at which the indicator starts M8IAJ8AO Je deuD flashing can be set by MAINTENANCE gt Battery in the setup menu For details see page 139 Recording red tally indicators Light when the camcorder is the following states Recording with the MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt HD SDI Remote I F menu item set to R Tally Red tally signal or call signal received when a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder
109. T F RUN SET R RUN switch SET a Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the media those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number shooting place etc For details see Setting the Time Data page 64 This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail screen display expand thumbnail screen display or essence mark thumbnail screen display DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the time counter display in the LCD monitor through the sequence COUNTER TC and U BIT see page 28 COUNTER Display the elapsed recording playback time hours minutes seconds frames TC Display timecode U BIT Display user bits data BRIGHT brightness button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table If you press the button with the LCD monitor off the LCD backlight comes on in the H state Setting LCD monitor backlight H High select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime M Brightness between H and L L Low select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night OFF Off the display is also off Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section THUMBNAIL indicator This lights when thumbnail screen is displayed THUMBNAIL button Press t
110. TIAL SETTING Country So Ace aa NTSC J Area PAL Area Turn the MENU knob to select the desired area of use Setting Area of use NTSC Area NTSC area for areas other than Japan NTSC J Area NTSC area Japan B PAL Area PAL area a The composite signal output from this camcorder is an NTSC signal with a black setup 7 5 IRE The system frequency is 59 94i b The composite signal output from this camcorder is an NTSC signal with no black setup The system frequency is 59 94i c The composite signal output from this camcorder is a PAL signal The system frequency is 50i Set the following items e Time Zone e Date Time See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 Turn the MENU knob to select Finish then press the MENU knob The camcorder is now ready for use You can set or change the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set are reflected in the timecode For menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 1 Select MAINTENANCE gt Clock Set gt Date Time in the setup menu MAINTENANCE Auto Shading oT APR Trigger Mode AY Network Setting Th Wi Fi Setting Date Mode YYMMDD AI Language 2 Press the MENU knob The Date Time setting window appears Date Time 1201 1 0K 0 Rn ee ae a 3 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value and press the knob The selection shifts to the next item on the right 4 To co
111. TION menu is set to Enable on SD mode On HD mode the video format is other than DV incompatible formats HQ 1920 23 98P HQ 1440 23 98P and HQ 1280 23 98P Input Output gt Output amp i LINK is set to SD amp DV and Input Output gt i LINK I O is set to Enable Operating Clips with a Computer The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or edited using the optional nonlinear editing software For these purposes the clips on an SxS memory card can be operated by directly loading the card in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or the optional SBAC US10 SxS Memory Card USB Reader Writer to the computer using an USB cable as shown below Using the ExpressCard Slot of a Computer If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard 34 or ExpressCard 54 slot you can directly insert the SxS memory card containing clips recorded with this camcorder and access to the files The SxS Device Driver Software and the UDF Driver Software must be downloaded and installed on your computer For details see Software downloads page 14 e Operation is not guaranteed with all computers For support information for the driver software visit the following URL http www sony net SxS Support To the ExpressCard slot SxS memory card Computer with SxS Device Driver Software installed With a Windows computer Check that a Removable Disk appears in My Compu
112. The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes 3 Select Number of Frames turn the MENU knob to select the number of frames to record in one take and then press the knob You can select from 1 3 6 9 or from 2 6 12 when the video format setting is 720 59 94P or 720 50P 4 Select Interval Time turn the MENU knob to select the desired interval and then press the knob You can select 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 sec 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 to 4 6 12 24 hour 5 As required select Pre Lighting turn the MENU knob to select the length of lighting time before recording starts and then press the knob You can select 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 sec 1 to 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 to 4 6 12 24 hour If you want to turn the video light on before the start of recording set the camcorder s LIGHT switch to AUTO The video light s switch must also be turned on When this is done the video light turns on and off Advanced Operations automatically However the video light remains lit when the time that it is off is five seconds or less If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the video light s switch on the video light is always lit It does not go on and off automatically The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is powered off but the number of frames interval time and pre lighting settings are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you shoot in I
113. V to 12 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 2 11 0V to 11 5V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 1 11 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Specify voltage threshold values that cause remaining capacity segments to go off in the display of remaining battery capacity see page 33 The segments go off below the specified value These values are used when the battery type has been found to be Other Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Audio Makes settings related to audio Front MIC Select Mono Stereo Selects whether the front microphone is monaural Mono or stereo Stereo Audio CH3 4 Mode Ch1 2 Switch Selects the input signals for the AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 connectors Ch1 2 The same signals as the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors Switch The signals selected with the AUDIO IN CH3 CH4 switches Rear XLR Auto On Off Turns on or off the XLR connection automatic detection for the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors on the rear panel Front MIC CH1 Ref 70dB 60dB 50dB 40dB 30dB 20dB Selects the reference level for channel 1 of the front microphone Front MIC CH2 Ref 70dB 60dB 50dB 40dB 30dB 20dB Selects the reference level for channel 2 of the front microphone Rear MIC CHI Ref 70dB 60dB 50dB 40dB 30dB 20dB Selects the reference input level when the setting of the AUDIO IN CHI switch is MIC
114. You can effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components in the subject Preset Execute Cancel Returns Hue and Saturation to their preset values execute by selecting Execute Axis B B MG MG MG Specifies a color targeted by multi R R YL YL YL G matrix correction 16 axis mode G G CY CY B Hue 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the hue of the color targeted by multi matrix correction for each 16 axis mode Saturation 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the saturation of the color targeted by multi matrix correction for each 16 axis mode V Modulation V Modulation On Off Turns V modulation shading on or Makes settings related off to V modulation Master V 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the master V modulation shading Modulati level V modulation shading gaan WE corrects vertical R V Modulation 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies the V modulation level of imbalances in R signals sensitivity arising from Gy Modulation 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the V modulation level of the relationship G signal between a lens and signals Q prism B V Modulation 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the V modulation level of B signals e Low Key Sat Low Key Saturation On Off Turns low key saturation correction Makes settings related on or off to low key saturation Tevel 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the saturation of colors in 5 correction gt Youtan corer the low luminance areas 5 saturation of colorsin Range Low L Mid H Mi
115. You can scroll through menus with more than seven lines by moving the cursor up and down Triangles appear at the upper right and lower right of the menu item selection area to indicate that a menu is scrollable OPERATION 3 2 Appears when more menu items are available below the last line A appears when more menu items are available above the first line Menu item selection area gt appears to the right when more detailed sub items are available Settings appear to the right when a menu item has no sub items e You can select 4 to return to the previous level Turn the MENU knob or press the 4 or J button to move the cursor to the item that you want to set and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button The sub items area appears to the right of the menu item selection area and the cursor moves to the first sub item OPERATION Format Format Media Input Output HD System Line Super impose System Frequency Kois Rec Format Rec Function Sub items area e Displays sub items and their current settings e To return to the previous level select lt gt press the lt button or push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side Basic Setup Menu Operations sBunjes pollrejedq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 111 sBunjes pelrejeq pue nuejy 9 J jdeU 9 112 4 Turn the MENU knob or press the 4 or J button to move the cursor to the sub item that you want to set and
116. a Config gt SDI Rec Control is set to Para in the setup menu Operation status of connected i LINK device The operating format HDV or DV and operation status of that device are indicated as follows Indication Meaning REC iiD HDV recording in progress STBY K Standby for HDV recording REC iA DV recording in progress STBY zENH Standby for DV recording al Video level indication clip transfer status indication when the CBK WA100 is used An indication is displayed together with an appropriate ND filter position number when the light level of the subject is too high or too low When an optional CBK WA100 is connected to the external device connector and you transfer clips between the camcorder and the CBK WA100 the number of clips that will be transferred and the transfer status of the clip currently being transferred will appear here allowing you to view the transfer progress If a level indication occurs during clip transfer this display will alternate between the level indication and the transfer status at 1 second intervals Timecode Caution message Indicates the elapsed recording playback time timecode user bits data or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch see page 22 Also indicates a caution message when caution is required such as when you try to change settings EJ Brightness level when the CBK VF01 is used Indicates the average brightness leve
117. a has been saved If an error message appears One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the save or as soon as you select Execute In this case the file is not saved to the SxS memory card Error message Problem What to do NG Cannot Save No recordable Insert media is recordable inserted media NG Media Full The media is Use media with full free capacity remaining When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select All Save USB gt Execute in step 2 To assign names to files Assigning a name before you save data in an ALL file can make it easier to distinguish your files The following characters can be used in file names Alphanumeric characters a z A Z 0 9 and special characters amp 3 lt gt T Select FILE gt All gt File ID in the setup menu 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a character and then press the MENU knob 3 Repeat step 3 When you have finished entering characters press the MENU knob to move the cursor to SET and then press the MENU knob The specified name is displayed When you save the file see page 166 the data will be saved under this name Loading Setting Data Note When you load a file from an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode the data saved in the camcorder s internal memory is overwritten See
118. adata planningmetadata assignld P0001 creationDate 2011 08 20717 00 00 09 00 lastUpdate 2011 09 28T10 30 00 09 00 load false version 1 00 gt lt Propertiesspproperty d assignment update 2011 08 20709 00 00 09 00 modifiedBy Chris gt lt TitlespusAscii Typhoon xml lang en gt Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo lt Title gt lt Properties gt lt PlanningMetadata gt Example of a planning metadata file You can shoot using clip names and shot mark names defined in advance in a planning metadata file This unit can display clip names and shot mark names defined in the following languages English e Chinese e German French P e Italian e Spanish Dutch V e Portuguese e Swedish e Norwegian e Danish Finnish 1 Some characters are displayed as different but similar characters If you define clip name and shot mark names in languages other than the above they may not be displayed on the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor screen with the display mode set to STATUS In the LCD monitor with the display mode set to STATUS only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be displayed Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder s Internal Memory To record planning metadata together with recording clips you need to load a planning metadata file into the camcorder s memory before starting to shoot There are two ways to load files Loadafile that has been written to
119. adecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the timecode track Press the DISP SEL EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display Set the DISPLAY switch to U BIT Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit flashes 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit Repeat until all digits are set To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00 Press the RESET RETURN button 5 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN or R RUN corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator To store the user bit setting in memory The user bit setting apart from the real time is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off Synchronizing the Timecode You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode You can also synchronize the timecode generators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Connections for timecode synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external timecode External timecode Reference video signal GENLOCK IN connector TC IN connector Setting the Time D
120. after repeated attempts at restoration it may be possible to restore the SxS memory card with the following procedure Use the camcorder s copy function see page 104 or the supplied application software see page 176 to copy the required clips to another SxS memory card Handling SxS Memory Cards Format the unusable SxS memory card on the camcorder Copy the required clips back to the newly formatted SxS memory card Recording and playback during restoration Even while restoration is in progress you can record and play an SxS memory card in the other card slot For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder be sure to use this camcorder Media recorded with a device other than this camcorder or with another camcorder of different version even of the same model may not be restored using this camcorder Handling USB Flash Drives UDF In UDF mode you can connect a USB flash drive connected to the external device to record save and load the following data Record proxy data see page 87 Load planning metadata see page 89 e Save and load setting data see page 166 If you are planning to use Sony USB flash drives with this camcorder the Pocket Bit Hi Speed LX Series is recommended e Use USB flash drives with capacity of 4 GB or greater USB flash drives other than the recommended flash drives listed above may not be recognized when connected to the USB connector Form
121. ail and is particularly effective in the following cases e Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window e Any high contrast scene 9 WHITE BAL white balance memory switch Controls adjustment of the white balance PRST Adjust the color temperature to the preset value the factory default setting 3200K Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B Push the Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 19 MBIAIOAC Ja deuD 20 AUTO W B BAL switch see page 18 on the WHITE side to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B B ATW D When this switch is set to B and OPERATION gt White Setting gt White Switch lt B gt is set to ATW in the setup menu ATW is activated You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when ATW is in use When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions Under some conditions of lighting or the shooting subject adjustment by ATW may fail to provide proper colors Examples When the subject of a substantially single color like sky sea ground grass or certain k
122. al CBK MD01 is installed d Converted to PsF and recorded sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Jejdeu9 In FAT mode FAT OPERATION gt Format menu settings Video format recording Frame size HD SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a format system frequency Line HD 1080 HQ 1920 59 94i HQ 1920 59 94i 1920x1080 50i HQ 1920 50i 29 97P HQ 1920 29 97P 25P HQ 1920 25P 23 98P HQ 1920 23 98P HQ 1440 59 94i HQ 1440 59 94i 1440x1080 50i HQ 1440 50i 29 97P HQ 1440 29 97P 25P HQ 1440 25P 23 98P HQ 1440 23 98P SP 1440 59 94i SP 1440 59 94i 50i SP 1440 50i 23 98P 5 SP 1440 23 98P 720 HQ 1280 59 94P HQ 1280 59 94P 1280x720 50P HQ 1280 50P 29 97P HQ 1280 29 97P 25P HQ 1280 25P 23 98P HQ 1280 23 98P SD DVCAM 59 94i DVCAM 59 94i 720x480 50i DVCAM 50i 720x576 29 97P 9 DVCAM 29 97P 720x480 25P 9 DVCAM 25P 720x576 a 59 94i 29 97P 59 94P 23 98P When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to NTSC Area or NTSC J Area 50i 25P 50P When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to PAL Area 54 Setting the Video Format b 59 94 after 2 3 pulldown is recorded c When the optional CBK MD01 is installed d Converted to PsF and recorded Selecting the Recording Mode Select the recording mode between UDF and FAT T Select OPERATION gt Format gt File System in the setup menu see page 114 OPERATION D 8
123. almost exhausted battery pack or low remaining media capacity Rec Review 3sec 10sec Clip Selects the recording review time Clip Review all of the most recently recorded clip SDI Rec Control Off Remote IF Para Specifies whether to control recording operations for the external device connected to the HD SD SDI OUT connector and specifies whether to synchronize the operations with the camera s recording operations Off Do not control recording operations Remote IF Control recording operations Para Synchronize recording operations on the external device with operations on the camcorder The SDI Rec Control setting cannot be changed while recording to a memory card is in progress or during iLINK output e Para can be selected when the following video formats are selected 1920 x 080 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P PsF output only 2 3 pulldown output is not supported 1440 x 1080 59 94i 50i 29 97P 25P 23 98P PsF output only 2 3 pulldown output is not supported 1280 x 720 59 94P 50P e Para cannot be selected when the Slow amp Quick Picture Cache Rec Interval Rec Frame Rec or Clip Continuous Rec recording mode is selected Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Camera Config Makes settings related to various camcorder operations HD SDI Remote I F Chara G Tally R Tally When SDI Rec Control is set to
124. als only Use MAINTENANCE gt GENLOCK in the setup menu to adjust the genlock H phase phase of horizontal sync signal Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 25 MGIAJ8AO Ja deyD 26 When the optional CBK HDO2 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed the camcorder can record analog composite video signals input to this connector TC IN timecode input connector BNC type To apply an external lock to the timecode of the camcorder input the reference timecode For details see Setting the Timecode page 64 VIDEO OUT connector BNC type Outputs video signals for monitoring The output signals can be selected either composite video or HD Y depending on the setting of OPERATION gt Input Output gt Output amp i LINK in the setup menu TC OUT timecode output connector BNC type To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this camcorder connect this connector to the external VTR s timecode input connector Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 2 gt H 2 AUDIO OUT REMOTE TALLY back tally indicators red Light up during recording They will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF These indicators also flash to indicate warnings see page 21 The tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same manner For details see Operation Warning
125. amma Category STD HG Selects use of standard gamma STD or HyperGamma HG Black Gamma Black Gamma On Off Turns black gamma correction on or Makes settings related off to black gamma Gamma Level 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the master black gamma P 5 correction level Black gamma sA correction allows you Range Low L Mid H Mid High Selects the black gamma correction to reproduce gradations and color nuances in black or near black dark parts of the picture effective range LOW O to 3 6 L MID O to 7 2 H MID 0 to 14 4 HIGH 0 to 28 8 Menu List PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Knee Knee On Off Turns knee correction on or off Makes settings related Knee Point 50 0 to 95 0 to Specifies the knee point to knee correction 109 0 Knee correction is processing that Knee Slope 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the knee slope prevents washout by Knee Saturation On Off Turns the knee saturation function compressing the bright on or off Parts a ee Knee Saturation 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies the knee saturation level according to an upper limit for the dynamic Level range of the recorded and output picture The signal level where knee processing begins is called the knee point and the slope of knee compression is called the knee slope White Clip White Clip On Off Turns white clipping adjustment on Makes settings related or off 10 we elie ping Lev
126. and settings including the white balance data to an SxS memory card as a user file execute by selecting Execute User Load USB in UDF mode only Loads a user file from a USB flash drive execute by selecting Execute User Save USB in UDF mode only Stores the current USER menu configuration and settings including the white balance data to a USB flash drive as a user file execute by selecting Execute File ID Assigns a name to a file Names can be up to 16 characters in length Recall User Preset Execute Cancel Returns the current USER menu settings to the preset values execute by selecting Execute Store User Preset Execute Cancel Stores the USER menu as a user file in which all menu settings are reset to the preset values execute by selecting Execute Clear User Preset Execute Cancel Returns the current USER menu settings to the factory default settings execute by selecting Execute Menu List FILE Menu items Sub item Settings Description User Load Customize Off On Selects whether to load both menu Makes settings for Data configuration and settings On or operating user files load only menu settings Off white balance data when loading a user file Load White Data Off On Selects whether to load On or not load Off white balance data when loading a user file All Display Mode Date amp Time Model Selects the items to be d
127. anual consists of information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this manual Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described in this manual without the express written permission of Sony Corporation
128. anufacturer Displays the name of the Makes settings related manufacturer of the installed lens to lens file operations only for lenses that support serial communication M V Modulation 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a vertical SAW shading compensation value in the lens file Lens Center H 40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker horizontal position in the lens file Lens Center V 40 to 0 to 40 Sets a center marker vertical position in the lens file Lens R Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a R flare level in the lens file Lens G Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a G flare level in the lens file Lens B Flare 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a B flare level in the lens file Lens W R Offset 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a R white balance compensation value in the lens file Lens W B Offset 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a B white balance compensation value in the lens file Shading Ch Sel Red Green Blue Selects the white shading compensation target L R G B H Saw 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a horizontal SAW white shading compensation value in the lens file L R G B H Para 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a horizontal parabola white shading compensation value in the lens file L R G B V Saw 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a vertical SAW white shading compensation value in the lens file L R G B V Para 99 to 0 to 99 Sets a vertical parabola white shading compensation value in the lens file Menu List Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Using the Assignable SW
129. are indicated while adjustments proceed When adjustments are finished messages showing the results of adjustments appear for three seconds Not only these indications are displayed on the viewfinder screen but a menu setting enables them to be output as video signals All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below Top of viewfinder screen ai ika Zog Co lA Sie Sa REC Mea 20 min 8A 1152 345 710 152 3 om High Light GH HUN 1 ATW 1 dB 12000 Se mimino B 120min Extender settings Indicates the setting of the digital extender function when optional CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed of this camcorder and the setting of the lens extender EX The lens extender is on 08 The lens shrinker is on x2D The digital extender function of this camcorder is on Ex2D The lens extender and the digital extender function of this camcorder are both on Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Digital extender function can be turned on or off by an assignable switch to which Digital Extender is assigned When slow amp Quick motion is selected or the freeze mix function is used the digital extender cannot be turned on When the camcorder is in focus magnification Focus Mag mode turning on the digital extender cancels the mode Zoom position when the lens is mounted Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in
130. ars below the image 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob To delete shot marks Select the frame where you want to delete a shot mark and then select THUMBNAIL gt Set Shot Mark gt Delete Shot Mark1 or Delete Shot Mark2 The properties screen of the selected frame appears and a confirmation message appears below the image 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob Changing Clip Index Pictures UDF FAT HD In the essence mark thumbnail screen see page 107 or the expand thumbnail screen see page 106 you can set the selected frame of the clip recorded in UDF FAT HD mode as the index picture Thumbnail Operations T Select the thumbnail of the frame that you want to use as the index picture and then select THUMBNAIL gt Set Index Picture The properties screen of the selected frame appears and a confirmation message appears below the image 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob Even if you set the index picture to a frame that is not the first frame of a clip playback of that clip from a thumbnail screen always begins at the first frame Dividing Clips FAT HD In the expand thumbnail screen see page 106 and the essence mark thumbnail screen see page 107 clips recorded in FAT HD mode can be divided into two clips at the selected frame Select the thumbnail of the frame where you want to divide the clip and then select THUMBNAIL gt Di
131. ars if there is not enough free capacity at the copy destination SxS memory card Exchange the card for one with more free capacity When multiple clips are recorded in a source SxS memory card it may not be possible to copy all clips to the end Depending on memory characteristics and usage of the memory cards this can occur even when the source and destination memory cards have the same capacity 1 In the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip to copy and then select THUMBNAIL gt Copy Clip The screen changes to the properties screen of that clip and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The copy starts During the copy an execution message and progress bar are displayed When the copy finishes the display returns to the thumbnail screen To cancel a copy operation Press the RESET RETURN button The copy is cancelled and the display returns to the thumbnail screen To batch copy groups of clips files You can batch copy groups of clips from one SxS memory card to another SxS memory card When both HD mode and SD mode clips exist on the source SxS memory card only clips in the currently selected mode are copied This is a convenient way to extract clips in one of the modes You can also copy of the files in the General directory either together with or separately from clips T m the thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the cli
132. ars in the viewfinder Playback also stops and the timecode screen appears in the viewfinder when you start recording during playback and when you eject an SxS memory card Basic Operations To display the camera picture during play Live amp Play function Live amp Play is a function that allows you to display the camera picture live video on the viewfinder screen during play This allows you to frame the next scene or adjust the focus and exposure while checking the camera picture live video on the viewfinder screen To frame the next scene you can use this function together with the Freeze Mix function see page 86 The Live amp Play function is enabled when the camcorder is set up as follows HD SD Number of system System frequency lines HD 1080 1920 59 94i 1920 50i 1440 59 94i 1440 50i 720 1280 59 94P 1280 50P SD 59 94i 50i 59 94i 50i To use the Live amp Play function set OPERATION gt Output gt Live amp Play in the setup menu to On The Live amp Play function cannot be turned on and off during playback or during thumbnail display The Live amp Play function cannot be used in Frame Rec Interval Rec and Slow amp Quick Motion modes and when the Slow Shutter function is enabled To use the Live amp Play function together with the Freeze Mix function start by operating while viewing the LCD monitor with the DISP SEL EXPAND button pressed to set the disp
133. at Turn off the POWER switch e Playback e Switched to thumbnail mode Framing Shots with the Freeze Mix Function The freeze mix function allows you to temporarily overlap a still image freeze picture from a clip shot in HD mode onto the current camera picture This makes it easier to frame the shot The freeze mix function is not available in the following cases e When the recording format is SP 1080 23 98P FAT mode or HQ 1280 23 98P UDF mode When the video formats of the recorded picture and the camera picture differ When you are shooting in Slow amp Quick Motion mode or slow shutter mode e When there is i LINK input To display a freeze mix picture 1 Play a clip or conduct a recording review of a clip with the same format as the camera picture 2 Display the picture that you want to use as the frame and then turn on the assignable switch to which the Freeze Mix function has been assigned The recording review picture is frozen and overlaps the camera picture The following functions are disabled at the freeze mix times e Menu operations During Focus Mag display Marker display e Zebra display Peaking display Skin tone details display To cancel the freeze mix display Do one of the following Press an assignable switch again to which the Freeze Mix function has been assigned The freeze mix display is canceled and the display returns to the normal camera picture e Start rec
134. ata sBunjes pue sluewisnfpy g ls 1deUD 65 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy JejdeU9 66 Example 2 Interconnecting a number of camcorders including one reference camcorder on l I NZ e e To another camcorder to be synchronized VIDEO OUT connector TC OUT connector TC IN connector GENLOCK IN connector To lock the timecode to an external source 1 Turn on the POWER switch 2 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 3 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN Set the DISPLAY switch to TC 5 Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector respectively Setting the Time Data This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the external timecode without losing the synchronization When you finish the above procedure the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the counter display will show the value of the external timecode However wait for afew seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder the camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked In such a case the interna
135. atting Initializing USB Flash Drives USB flash drives must be formatted with the FAT32 file system Before using a drive format it on this camcorder or a PC If a drive formatted on a PC cannot be used format it on the camcorder 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the external device connector When the drive is unformatted or has been formatted to other specifications a message to confirm if formatting is to be executed appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and press the knob When formatting is completed the message Format USB Memory Done is displayed The MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC folder and the General Sony Planning folder are automatically created in the drive If the format operation fails A format operation may fail because the USB flash drive is write protected or because it is not the type of drive specified for use with this camcorder In this case an error message appears Following the instructions in the error message and exchange the drive for one that can be used with this camcorder To format by menu operation When no formatting message is displayed you can execute formatting by menu operation 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the external device connector 2 Select OPERATION gt USB gt Format USB Memory in the setup menu 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob The confirmation message for formatting is displayed on the
136. ay also stops if you eject the memory card In this case the camera picture appears in the viewfinder To cue up clips To return to the top of the current clip Press the PREV button e During playback or F FWD this jumps to the top of the current clip and starts play During F REV or pause this jumps to the top of the current clip and displays a still image Each subsequent press of the button moves to the previous clip To play from the top of the first clip Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons This jumps to the top of the first clip on the SxS memory card To jump to the top of the next clip Press the NEXT button e During playback or F FWD this jumps to the top of the next clip and starts play e During F REV or pause this jumps to the top of the next clip and displays a still image Each subsequent press of the button moves to the next clip To play from the top of the last clip Simultaneously press the NEXT and F FWD buttons This jumps to the top of the last clip on the SxS memory card To add a shot mark during play HD You can add shot marks to clips during play by using the same method used during recording see page 79 Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory card is write protected e Shot marks cannot be added at the first frame of each clip or last frame of the last clip Using Thumbnails to Search Inside Clips You can switch a thumbnail screen t
137. ayejeaq pue nuejy 9 JaydeyD 147 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 148 MAINTENANCE Sub item Settings Description Camera Config Makes settings related to various camcorder ALAC Auto Off Specifies whether to perform ALAC Auto Lens Aberration Compensation automatically Auto Perform ALAC automatically when an ALAC compatible lens is attached and ALAC is enabled Off Do not perform Color Bars Select ARIB 100 75 SMPTE Selects the color bar type User Menu Only On Off Selects whether to display the USER menu only On or display the menu list Off when the camcorder enters the menu mode RM Common Memory On Off Selects whether to share On or not share Off settings between times when a remote control unit is connected and times when the camcorder is used locally When a remote control unit is connected this setting is disabled RM Rec Start RM CAM PARA For times when a remote control unit is connected selects whether recording start stop buttons are enabled on the camcorder or the remote control unit RM Remote control unit CAM Camcorder PARA Both Rec Start Stop Beep On Off Specifies whether to generate On or not generate Off a beep alarm when recording starts stops With this item set to On a single beep sounds when recording starts and a double beep sounds when recording stops Rec Status Indicator Viewfinder L
138. battery pack Holding the release button in pull the battery pack up Preparing a Power Supply 37 suoleledeld gsajdeyo 38 Release button During recording and playback while the ACCESS lamp on the right side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange be careful never to remove the battery pack Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card e Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack Using AC Power Mount an AC DN2B DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DN2B DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power To an AC outlet JT Attaching the Viewfinder Attaching the Viewfinder When the viewfinder is attached do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire The viewfinder is supplied separately The following procedure is an example for attaching the HDVF 20A For procedures for attaching other viewfinders refer to a manual supplied with each viewfinder Attaching the Viewfinder Note When attaching the viewfinder make notes of the following points Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder s VF connector 20 pin If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on the viewfinder may not
139. been marked with an OK NG or KP mark Normal thumbnail screens display SD clips only or HD clips only even if the SxS memory card contains clips in both formats You can select the format to display by selecting a mode with OPERATION gt Format gt HD SD see page 114 in the setup menu If you want to display all recorded clips regardless of the HD SD mode switch to the all clips thumbnail screen However it is not possible to start playback from the all clips thumbnail screen see page 101 Clip Playback suoiesado dijo G sajdeyo 93 suolye1ado dijo G sajdeyp 94 UDF mode FAT HD mode thumbnail screen UDF FAT HD Cursor yellow The icon of the currently selected SxS memory card is highlighted If the card is write protected a lock appears on the left Clip number Number of clips Index picture When a clip is recorded its first frame is set automatically as the index picture You can change to index picture to any frame see page 108 Lock mark Indicates the selected clip is marked with an OK mark or protected Date and start time of recording Clip name Independent AV file icon This appears only when a clip is an independent AV file SxS memory cards may contain independent files that have been added directly from a computer Because independent files lack the associated management files some operations and information displays may no
140. camcorder is loaded Operation Warnings Reached Clip Number Limit Media Error Media Error Cannot Record to Media A Media A Needs to be Restored Cannot Record to Media A Media Error Cannot Use Media A V Unsupported File System WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder module Action to take The maximum number of clips for a single memory card is reached No more clip can be recorded on the Recording stops Replace it with another card module card WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining 5 S Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take g module o An error occurred with Recording stops Remove the card load it again and restore it z the memory card The m card requires z p po restoration D po fa WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take Recording cannot be done as the memory card is defective Recording stops As playback may be possible it is recommended to replace it with another card after copying the clips as required WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining 5 S Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module Neither recording nor Recording stops It cannot be operated with thi
141. ce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library About OpenSSL 201 xlpueddy 202 being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE
142. cess and file based operation You can choose FAT or UDF as the file system for recording media Light weight low power consumption Design features custom video signal processing ICs and SxS memory card recording enable fanless operation and power consumption of 27 W or less The camcorder s light weight 3 4 kg 7 Ib 7 9 0z and low center of gravity make it easy to carry on the shoulder while ensuring superior stability HD recording using the MPEG 2 Long GOP codec and SD recording in MPEG IMX50 DVCAM format The camcorder records 1920 x 1080 1440 x 1080 and 1280 x 720 HD images using MPEG 2 Long GOP codec compression For recording in FAT mode it offers a choice of bit rates either 35 Mbps HQ mode or 25 Mbps SP mode For recording in UDF mode it offers a choice of bit rates either 35 Mbps HQ mode or 50 Mbps HD422 mode By utilizing an efficient compression format the camcorder records high quality HD images for long recording time of approx 60 minutes at 50 Mbps HD422 mode or approx 90 minutes at 35 Mbps HQ mode on a single 32 GB SxS memory card when the recording mode is UDF It can also record and play two SD formats MPEG IMX 50 Mbps and DVCAM 25 Mbps 1 CBK MDO1 SD Record and Playback Key required For details contact a Sony service representative M8IAJSAO JeldeyU99 Multi format support The camcorder supports interlace format recording 1080 59 94i or 1080 50i pr
143. creen see page 93 is displayed It is disabled when no thumbnail screen is displayed Ma MAINTENANCE menu Settings related to audio and timecode see page 139 Fi FILE menu Settings related to file operations see page 156 Setup Menu Levels See THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration page 98 for the organization of the THUMBNAIL menu USER menu see page 113 USER Format Media Rec Function m Input Output m Clip Assignable SW Camera Config OPERATION Menu see page 114 OPERATION Format Format Media Input Output Super Impose m LCD Rec Function t Assignable SW VF Setting Marker Gain Switch tL TLCS t Zebra Display On Off m P LED Auto Iris e Shot ID Shot Display m White Setting Offset White Shutter Time Zone m Clip Plan Metadata L USB Setup Menu Organization and Levels sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 109 PAINT Menu see page 133 FILE Menu see page 156 PAINT FILE t Switch Status User White All Black Scene Flare Reference L Gamma Lens Knee Matrix Black Gamma _ White Clip _ Detail HD Mode __ Detail SD Mode Aperture _ Skin Detail L Multi Matrix V Modulation Low Key Saturation L _ Noise Suppress MAINTENANCE Menu see page 139 MAINTENANCE sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 110 White Shading Black Shading Battery Audio
144. ctually recorded may be later than the currently specified picture cache time Because the delay increases as the number of recorded clips increases you should avoid rapid start and stop recording operations in picture cache mode Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always F RUN In picture cache mode you cannot set time data by setting the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET To set time data exit picture cache mode If the remaining free capacity of the media in the currently selected slot is less than the picture cache time and the media in the other slot has enough remaining capacity then data is recorded to the media in the other slot However no data is recorded when there is no media in the other slot and when the media in the other slot does not have enough remaining capacity A message appears in the viewfinder to inform you that there is not enough remaining capacity e Shot marks are not recorded if they are set before the recording start operation When you select a video format that supports i LINK HDV output and play a clip that was recorded in picture cache mode two or more frames with the same picture and timecode may follow on each other i LINK output is possible during picture cache recording However the picture cache time is limited If power is lost during recording If you set the camcorder s POWER switch to OFF
145. d High Specifies the luminance level for U dark parts of the video which low key saturation is enabled Q only gt Noise Suppress Noise Suppress On Off Turns noise suppression on or off 2 n o 5 Q N Menu List 138 MAINTENANCE Menu Settings in bold are the factory default values MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description White Shading Channel Select Red Green Blue Selects the target of white shading Makes settings related correction to white shading R G B White H Saw 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a SAW white shading White shading is A 8 required for each correction value for the horizontal different lens to correct direction irregularities arising R G B White H Para 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a parabola white shading from lens correction value for the horizontal characteristics It direction corrects luminance and color irregularities in R G B White V Saw 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a SAW white shading bright areas correction value for the vertical direction R G B White V Para 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a parabola white shading correction value for the vertica direction White Saw Para On Off Turns the white shading SAW and parabola correction functions on or off Black Shading Channel Select Red Green Blue Selects the target of black shading Makes settings related correction to black shading R G B Black H Saw 99 to 0 to 9
146. dendienst oder Garantie wenden Sie sich bitte an die in den separaten Kundendienst oder Garantiedokumenten aufgef hrten Anschriften Table of Contents Foreword s Before USE z AWA AA wzia 12 Mode Indications in This Manual ccsccsssscssscssssssessscsssscsssccesscceees 12 Chapter 1 Overview OCZU OC 13 Using the CD ROM manual 1 2 200 200000s000000000o000000000o0eonooaowowaowo 0000000 15 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls ssssscscssssssssesesessees 15 Power Supply 22 cos cos con ect a a Ay 15 Accessory Attachments 16 Operating and Connectors Section 17 21 LCD Monitor e usuaseuaosuaeaaaea2 HDVF 20A Viewfinder Optional 29 CBK VF01 Viewfinder Optional cececeseseeseeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeee 30 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 1211112111111 31 Chapter 2 Preparations Preparing a Power Supply s eseseseseseseseososerceesosesoseseseseseseoeeeoeososososesosesesese 37 Using a Battery Pack i SE USNSAC POWER AA N E EEE AAE ET 38 Attaching the Viewfinder sseseseseseseseoeseoroeoeosoroseseseseseseseoeoeosssoroeceosesesese 38 Attaching the Viewfinder seeseesessessessseeisrsrsesrererreserrerrerseere 38 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position ieee eeeeeseeeeseeeneeeeeeeees 39 Using the BKW 401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket 39 Detaching the
147. ding 87 external input signals 178 from pre stored video 80 indicators 31 on an external device 177 proxy data 87 remaining time 73 review 77 shot marks 79 time lapse video 81 Recording mode 55 special settings indication 32 34 Red tally indicators 31 REMOTE connector 27 Reset 112 168 RESET RETURN button 22 S Scene file s loading 169 saving 168 SDI IN connector 25 Search with the essence mark thumbnail screen 97 with the expand thumbnail screen 97 SET button 23 Setup menu 109 basic operations 111 FILE menu 156 MAINTENANCE menu 139 menu list 113 OPERATION menu 114 PAINT menu 133 USER menu 113 SHIFT button 24 Shooting 70 basic operations 76 stop motion animations 83 with Slow amp Quick motion 84 Shot data 67 Shot ID 67 Shot mark s adding 108 adding during playback 97 defining names 92 deleting 108 recording 79 Shoulder pad 17 adjusting the position 52 Shoulder strap fitting 16 Shoulder strap using 51 xepul Shutter setting 59 speed 59 SHUTTER selector 17 Index 205 xepul 206 Slotcover 25 SLOT SELECT button 25 Speaker 21 Specifications 192 Status information 68 Status screens 68 ASSIGN SWITCH 68 AUDIO 68 BATTERY MEDIA 69 CAMERA 68 VIDEO 68 STOP button 22 Stopper 29 30 SxS memory card slots 25 SxS memory cards 70 ejecting 72 formatting 72 loading 71 restoring 74 selecting 72 System configuration 179 T Tally indicator 29 30 TALLY indicators 26 TALLY switch 2
148. dio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4 specifies whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel Mono or in stereo mode Stereo AGC Spec 6dB 9dB 12dB Selects the AGC saturation level 15dB 17dB Limiter Mode Off 6dB 9dB 12dB For manual audio level adjustments 15dB 17dB selects the saturation level for the limiter applied to loud input signals Select Off if you do not wish to use the limiter Output Limiter On Off Turns the audio output limiter on or off CH1 Wind Filter On Off Turns the channel 1 wind filter on or off CH2 Wind Filter On Off Turns the channel 2 wind filter on or off CH3 Wind Filter On Off Turns the channel 3 wind filter on or off CH4 Wind Filter On Off Turns the channel 4 wind filter on or off Audio SG 1KHz On Off Auto Selects whether to output On or not output Off a 1 kHz test signal in color bar mode Auto Output a test signal only when the AUDIO SELECT CHI switch is set to AUTO MIC CHI Level Side1 Front Front Sidel For recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 1 selects the knob that adjusts the audio level Sidel The LEVEL knob left on the side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Sidel Adjust with both the LEVEL knob left and the MIC LEVEL control MIC CH2 Level Side2 Front Front Side2 For recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 2 selects
149. e UBG Recorded user bits UBR Playback user bits CNT Counter CLK Time display when the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the timecode value the timecode is displayed in the format shown below When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold the timecode is displayed in the normal format 00 00 100 00 The three dots indicates that timecode is displayed in the hold mode Warning indicator area Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs For details see Operation Warnings on page 182 You can also display the name of the next clip to be recorded see page 131 Remaining media capacity indicator Shows bar segments indicating the remaining capacity of recording media in the slots Remaining battery capacity indicator Shows bar segments indicating the remaining battery capacity HDVF 20A Viewfinder Optional Plug Connect to the VF connector 20 pin on the camcorder Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side Camera operator tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording This indicator can be covered when not in use This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the tally indicator and the recording red tally indicators in the viewfinder El Eyecup Indicators and status displa
150. e ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section The ACCESS lamp goes out and a completion message appears when the data has been loaded When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select User Load USB gt Execute in step 2 The ACCESS lamp does not light while the save is being executed in step 5 chapter You can connect a control device such as an RM B150 B170 B750 Remote Control Unit or RCP 1001 1501 Remote Control Panel and operate this camcorder For details on connection and operation of the control device refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder Connecting External Monitors Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected sedlneq jeuse xy GUND8UU09 g Je deup HD SD SDI amp OUT BNC cable not supplied SDI IN m S57 VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT BNC cable not supplied Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD the Ma same status information and menus can be SD signals down converted for output have the displayed on the external monitor as those on the f i following restrictions viewfinder screen Images of 50P 50i 25P are output as PAL signals those of 59 94P 59 94i 29 97P are output as NTSC signals and
151. e from the center to the left and right edges User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor height distance from the center to the top and bottom edges User Box H Position 479 to 0 to 479 Specifies the horizontal position of the box cursor center User Box V Position 464 to 0 to 464 Specifies the vertical position of the box cursor center Guide Frame On Off Turns display of the guide frame on or off When three of Center Marker Safety Zone User Box and 100 Marker are set to On this setting cannot be turned on Gain Switch Gain Low 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies the gain value for the Makes settings 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB L position of the GAIN switch related to the GAIN 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB Switch Gain Mid 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies the gain value for the 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB M position of the GAIN switch 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB Gain High 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies the gain value for the 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB H position of the GAIN switch 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB Gain Turbo 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies the gain value for the Turbo 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB Gain function which can be assigned to 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB an assignable switch Shockless Gain On Off Turns shockless gain a function that switches smoothly when the gain is switched on or off Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description TLCS Mode
152. e Viewfinder Display on the viewfinder for computers screen LCD Status Display on the LCD monitor with the display mode se to STATUS Both Display on both the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor Note If a clip with the same name as the next clip to be recorded already exists on the recording media then immediately after recording begins the clip name is displayed with a different serial number when the selection is other than Off Update Media lt A gt Media lt B gt Updates the management files on the media in the selected slot execute by selecting Execute Menu List sBunjes payreyaq pue nuejy 9 JaydeyD 131 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Plan Metadata Load Slot A Execute Cancel Makes settings for operating planning metadata Executes load of planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot A Select Execute to show the list of the planning metadata files stored in the slot A SxS memory card and select a file to execute the load Load Slot B Execute Cancel Executes load of planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot B Select Execute to show the list of the planning metadata files stored in the slot B SxS memory card and select a file to execute the load Load USB Execute Cancel in UDF mode only Executes load of planning metadata from the USB flash drive connected to the external device connector Select Execute to show the list of the
153. e formatted with the FAT32 file system to the external device connector see page 75 A file list appears The file list displays up to 64 files Even if the total number of planning metadata files is 64 or less all of the planning metadata files may not appear if the directory where they are located on the USB flash driver General Sony Planning contains 512 or more files 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load and press the knob To display detailed information in planning metadata After loading planning metadata into this unit you can check the detailed information that it contains such as file names date and time of creation and titles 1 Under OPERATION gt Plan Metadata gt Properties in the setup menu select Execute 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob The PLANNING METADATA PROPERTIES list appears The list contains the following information Planning Metadata Operations Item Information File Name File name Assign ID Assign ID Created Date and time of creation Modified Date and time of most recent modification Modified by Name of person who modified the file Title Titlel specified in file ASCII format clip name Title2 Title2 specified in file UTF 8 format clip name Material Gp Number of clips in material group a Shot MarkO to Names defined in file for Shot Shot Mark9 Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 a Material group A g
154. e in step 2 the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section when you execute the save When the data has been saved a completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select Lens Store USB gt Execute in step 2 When you save a lens file that was set another PMW 500 camcorder for a serial lens to the USB flash drive save it with that serial lens mounted on this camcorder to enable automatic loading of the same lens file Lens Auto Recall Loading Lens Files To load a lens file from an SxS memory card insert the SxS memory card into a memory card slot and then proceed as follows See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Select FILE gt Lens in the setup menu 2 Select Lens Recall Mem gt Execute if you want to load the file from the camcorder s internal memory and select Lens Recall SxS gt Execute if you want to load the file from an SxS memory card 3 Press the MENU knob If you select Execute a list box of lens files appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers 4 Select the desired file number and then press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the load select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the l
155. ea is highlighted with SET displayed to the right Basic Setup Menu Operations 1 Turn the MENU knob or press the 4 or J button to select a character and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button The cursor moves to the next position To return to the previous position push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side 2 Select characters for all positions up to the last The cursor moves to SET 3 Press the MENU knob or the SET button This confirms the setting To cancel the setting change Push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE side To reset a setting to the initial value Beforea setting is changed or after a setting change is cancelled push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST side 2 When the message to confirm whether the current setting is reset to the initial value push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST side again The current setting is reset to the initial value To exit the menu Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF or press the MENU button The normal camera picture reappears The USER menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state e Format Media see page 115 e Input Output see page 116 Rec Function see page 119 Assignable Sw see page 120 Clip see page 129 e Camera Config see page 146 1 Excluding sub item lt 0 gt 2
156. ed into the camcorder set to UDF mode e An SxS memory card which was formatted in FAT mode is loaded into the camcorder set to UDF mode Cases in which a message to confirm if formatting is to be executed appears When an SxS memory card which was formatted in UDF mode is loaded into the camcorder set to FAT mode a message to confirm if formatting is to be executed in FAT mode appears in the viewfinder see page 72 Checking the Remaining Recording Time You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking the recording media remaining capacity display in the viewfinder Buqooys b Jejdey 9 00 00 tND2 A 60min mimm B 120min aaF 1 6 The camcorder calculates the remaining recording time for the media in each slot on the basis of the current video format recording bit rate and displays it in units of minutes You can also check the remaining time in the BATTERY MEDIA status screen see page 69 The Bi mark appears when a memory card is write protected When to exchange SxS memory cards e The warning message Media Near Full appears the WARNING indicator and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen flash and the buzzer sounds when the total remaining recording time of the two memory cards falls to five minutes during recording Exchange one of the cards for media with available recording capacity Handling SxS Memory Cards 73 Bunooys p Je dBUD 7
157. eeeee owane nana 70 Loading and Ejecting SxS Memory CardS 0 2 1 10 1222 71 Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use e e euaeaoeaeaua0 72 Table of Contents 7 8 Formatting Initializing SxS Memory Cards eects 72 If You Load a Memory Card Formatted in the Different Recording Mode from the Mode Selected on the Camcorder 73 Checking the Remaining Recording Time 2 121111111111 73 Restoring SxS Memory Cards ceceeceeseeseseseeeeesenesseeseseeeeeeeaes 74 Handling USB Flash Drives ssssscssssssssrssssssssssesesessssseesesssssssseseseees 75 Formatting Initializing USB Flash Drives 121121211 1 75 Restoring USB Flash Drives e eeee eo aaa aaa waza 75 Basic Operations cscccsscsssscsssscsscesssssssscssscssssessscsssssesssssscessssesessesseseses 76 Playing Recorded Clipsy accosted Z oO A AO 78 Deleting Recorded Clips c ccc eeseeesseescseeseeeesceecseeeceeeseeeeseeaeees 79 Advanced Operations sssssssrsssessssssesesssssscsessssssesesessssseeseessessasecsseees 79 Recording Shot Marks cccccecessecsesseeeceeeeseseeeeeseeerseeeeseeeseeaes 79 Setting OK Marks zed doi A AO Gd 80 Starting to Record from Pre stored Video Picture Cache Function OISE RRS AECO RZA 80 Recording Time lapse Video Interval Rec Function 81 Shooting Stop Motion Animations Frame Rec F
158. el NTSC Area or NTSC Specifies the white clip level adjustments White clipping is processing that limits the maximum level of video output signals The maximum video signal output value is called the white clip level Area J is selected for Country 90 0 to 108 0 to 109 0 PAL Area is selected for Country 90 0 to 105 0 to 109 0 Menu List sBunjes payeyeaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 135 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 136 PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Detail HD Mode Detail On Off Turns detail adjustment on or off Detail SD Mode Level 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the detail level Makes settings related H V Ratio to details adjustments 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies the mix ratio between the H detail level and the V detail level in HD mode and SD mode Crispening 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the crispening level Detail adjustment is Level Depend processing that On Off Turns the level depend adjustment function on or off improves the clarity of the video by adding Level Depend Level 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the level depend level detail signals to the Frequency edges of the subject 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the central frequency for H detail signals Larger values give finer details Knee Aperture On Off Turns the knee aperture function on or off Knee Aperture Level 09
159. ems and the controls are as follows MIC CHI Level Channel 1 recording level Setting Knob Sidel LEVEL CH1 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Front Sidel LEVEL CH1 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation MIC CH2 Level Channel 2 recording level Setting Knob Side2 LEVEL CH2 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Front Side2 LEVEL CH2 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and LEVEL CH1 CH2 knobs linked together if the LEVEL CH1 CH2 knobs are set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the LEVEL CH1 CH2 knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL control Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 Selecting the recorded audio You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3 CH4 switches CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target FRONT Front microphone audio REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN CHI connector WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target FRONT Front microphone audio REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH2 connector WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio You can have the selection made automatically as follows To automatically select the same audio as on channels 1 and 2 Set MAINTENANCE gt Audio gt Audio CH3 4 Mode of the setup menu to Ch1 2 Adjusting the audio recording levels
160. ended Clear Scan mode Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens As shown in the following tables the range of shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on whether the Slow amp Quick Motion S amp Q function is on or off gt Input Output gt i Link I O is set to Enable in the setup menu It is not possible to output the color bar signal turn the SLS mode on or off or change the number of accumulated frames when the number of accumulated frames is set to 16 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed When the automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases thus reducing the depth of field The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency Setting the Electronic Shutter 59 s um pue sluewisnipy JejdeU9 60 To switch between Speed mode and Angle mode 1 Select OPEARTION gt Shutter Select gt Shutter Select in the setup menu see page 128 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Second or Degree and then press the knob To set the shutter mode and standard mode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off 1 Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT The current shutter setting indication appears for about three seconds 2 Before the shutter setting indication disappears push the
161. eo light with power consumption of over 50 W e When connecting a device to the DC OUT connector use one with current consumption of 0 5 A or less Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Recording playback formats UDF mode HD422 Video codec MPEG 2 422P HL Video rate 50 Mbps CBR Video samples 1920 x 1080 1280 x 720 Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio LPCM 4CH 24 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law HD420 Video codec MPEG 2 MP HL 1440 Video rate 35 Mbps VBR Video samples 1920 x 1080 1440 x 1080 Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law Video codec MPEG 2 MP HL Video rate 35 Mbps VBR Video samples 1280 x 720 Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock Specifications IMX Video codec MPEG 2 422PQ MIL Intra Video rate 50 Mbps Video samples 720 x 486 NTSC 576 PAL Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio LPCM 4CH 24 16 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law DVCAM Video rate 25 Mbps Video samples 720 x 480 NTSC 576 PAL Proxy video MPEG 4 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz Proxy audio A law FAT mode e HD420 Video codec MPEG 2 MP HL Video rate 35 Mbps VBR Video samples 1920 x 1080 1280 x 720 Audio LPCM 4CH 16 bits 48 kHz Video codec MPEG 2 MP HL 1440 Video rate 35 Mbps VBR Video samples 1440 x 108
162. er position Lens R Flare Lens G Flare Lens B Flare Flare level White balance Lens W R Offset compensation value Lens W B Offset White shading L R G B H Saw L R G B H Para L R G B V Saw L R G B V Para compensation value See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Saving Lens Files To save a lens file to an SxS memory card insert the card into a memory card slot and then proceed as follows See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Select FILE gt Lens in the setup menu To assign a name to the data before saving it Assign a name before proceeding to step 2 For details see To assign names to files page 167 2 Select Lens Store Mem gt Execute if you want to save the data in the camcorder s internal memory and select Lens Store Saving and Loading Lens Files SxS gt Execute if you want to save the data on an SxS memory card 3 Press the MENU knob If you select Execute a list box of lens file number appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers 4 Select the file number under which you want to save the data and then press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the save select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the save select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you selected Lens Store SxS gt Execut
163. ernal input when the optional CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed if the unit is currently conducting recording or play the switch takes sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 seydeyo 162 effect after the recording or playback ends a When Picture Cache is assigned OPERATION gt Rec Function in the setup menu is disabled displayed in grey to keep the setting unchanged Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 1 and 3 Switches the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches and the COLOR TEMP Button Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Off No assignment Front Mic Switch between stereo On and monaural Off when a stereo microphone is connected Setting retained Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off Setting retained Last Clip Delete Delete the most recently recorded clip ATW Turn ATW auto tracing white balance mode on or off Setting not retained ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode EZ Mode Execute EZ mode according to the setting of Setting retained OPERATION gt TLCS Turbo Gain Execute Turbo Gain according to the setting of Setting not retained OPERATION gt Gain Switch gt Gain Turbo Rec Review Conduct a recording review Rec Start or stop recording Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off Setting retained Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix fu
164. et to Off When Picture Cache is assigned to an assignable switch this item is disabled displayed in grey Frame Rate The available settings vary depending on the Format gt HD System Line setting When the Slow amp Quick setting is On sets the frame rate for Slow amp Quick Motion shooting When Format gt Country is set to other than PAL Area in UDF mode or in FAT mode 1 to 30 When Format gt Country is set to PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 25 When the HD System Line setting is 1080 When Format gt Country is set to other than PAL Area in UDF mode or in FAT mode to 30 to 60 When Format gt Country is set to PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 25 to 50 When the HD System Line setting is 720 Clip Continuous Rec On Off Turns the Clip Continuous Rec function on or off When this is set to On the Slow amp Quick Picture Cache Rec Interval Rec and Frame Rec sub items are set to Off Picture Cache Rec On Off Turns the picture cache function on or off When this is set to On the Slow amp Quick Interval Rec Frame Rec sub items are set to Off P Cache Rec Time 0 2sec 2 4sec 4 6sec 6 8sec 8 10sec 10 12sec 12 14sec 13 15sec When the Picture Cache Rec setting is On set the picture cache time Interval Rec On Off Turns the Interval Rec function on or off When this is set to On the Slow Quick Picture Cache Rec and Frame Rec sub items are se
165. etup menu to switch between NTSC and PAL To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal to an external analog composite device it may be necessary to change the input signal setting of that external device to be matched with the analog composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT connector To input camcorder output audio to an external device such as a monitor or VTR or other recording device connect the audio output of the AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that external device Connecting External Monitors For connection use a BNC cable not supplied i LINK HDV DV connector In FAT mode i LINK HDV DV connector supports HDV and DV input output However DV streams cannot be recorded on this camcorder This connector can be used to connect a device that supports i LINK HDV The device type can be a monitor read write device such as VTR or HDD or computer To input output HDV signals HDV input output is supported when the video format is an HDV compatible format SP 1440 59 94i SP 1440 50i or SP 1440 23 98P Input Output gt Output amp i LINK in the OPERATION menu is set to HD amp HDV or SD amp HDV and Input Output gt i LINK I O is set to Enable When the video format is SP 1440 23 98P a 59 94i HDV signal subjected to 2 3 pulldown processing is output To input output DV signals DV input output is supported under either of the following conditions Input Output gt i LINK I O in the OPERA
166. eze Makes settings related to I O signals Selects the signal conversion mode for output of SD signals Crop Crop the edges of the 16 9 picture and output as a 4 3 picture Letter Mask the top and bottom of the 4 3 picture and display in the center of the screen as a 16 9 picture Squeeze Squeeze the 16 9 picture horizontally and output as a 4 3 picture Wide ID Through Auto Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD output signal Through Output without adding a wide ID signal Auto Add and output a wide ID signal when the Down Converter setting is Squeeze Wide Mode EXT Auto 16 9 When the input signal is SD select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal Auto When wide a ID signal is detected in the input signal treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up converter operating mode to squeeze mode When a wide ID signal is not detected set the upconverter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record a wide ID signal 16 9 Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to squeeze mode Setup 7 5 10 0 Remove EXT When the Country setting is other than PAL Area selects whether to remove the setup level of analog input video signals 7 5 Remove the setup 0 0 Do not remove the setup Menu List sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 117 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 1
167. f use can be meter reset Reset Execute Cancel Resets Hours Reset to 0 Execute by selecting Execute Version Version Displays the software version of the Displays the version of camcorder Vx xx the camcorder and CBK HD02 Displays the software version of the updates the camcorder CBK HD02 Vx xx Version Up Execute Cancel Updates the camcorder execute by selecting Execute This cannot be selected unless an SxS memory card is inserted a When the optional CBK HD02 is installed Menu List sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 155 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 156 FILE Menu Settings in bold are the factory default values FILE Menu items Sub item Settings Description User User Load SxS Execute Cancel Makes settings for operating user files Loads a user file from an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute When Load Customize Data is set to Off Replace the current USER menu settings with settings stored in the loaded use file with the original menu configuration unchanged When Load Customize Data is set to On Replace the current USER menu configuration and settings with those stored in the loaded use file When User Load White is set to Off Load a user file excluding white balance data User Load White is set to On Load a user file including white balance data User Save SxS Execute Cancel Stores the current USER menu configuration
168. ff No assignment Lens RET Display return video signals when the optional CBK HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is connected When a camera extension unit is not connected function as follows During recording or playback Write a shot mark In the other states Conduct a recording review if playback is allowed Return Video Display return video signals when the optional CBK HDO2 is installed and a camera extension unit is connected Rec Review Execute recording review Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2 Clip Flag OK Add Clear an OK mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played Clip Flag NG Add Clear an NG mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played Clip Flag Keep Add Clear a KP mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off Setting not retained Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 165 eleq Bunjes 1esf Guipeo pue Bunes 1ejdeuU9 166 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Loading Settings You can save setup menu settings in the camcorder s internal memory and on SxS memory cards or USB flash drives in UDF mode This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set of menu settin
169. functions WHITE Adjust the white balance automatically If the WHITE BAL switch see page 19 is set to A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate BLACK Adjust the black set and black balance automatically You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when the ATW Auto Tracing White Balance function is operating If you push the switch to the WHITE side once more during the automatic white balance adjustment the adjustment is cancelled and the Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls white balance setting returns to the original setting If you push the switch to the BLACK side once more during the automatic black balance adjustment the adjustment is cancelled and the black balance setting returns to the original setting g MIC microphone LEVEL control Adjusts the input level of audio channels 1 2 3 and 4 see page 62 Right side near the front menu emcees ESCAPE ASSIGN assignable 1 2 3 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on OPERATION gt Assignable SW in the setup menu see page 161 Off is assigned to the ASSIGN 1 2 3 switches as the factory default setting The ASSIGN 1 3 switches are provided with an indicator to show whether a function is assigned to the switch ON or no
170. g a number of 4 NTSC ival preset matrixes which ji purva ent define different 5 EBU equivalent parameter sets Or you 6 PAL equivalent can select a user matrix User Matrix On Off Turns the user matrix function on or with your own off parameters User Matrix R G 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined R G user matrix User Matrix R B 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined R B user matrix User Matrix G R 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined G R user matrix User Matrix G B 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined G B user matrix User Matrix B R 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined B R user matrix User Matrix B G 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a freely defined B G user matrix Menu List s6unies pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 137 PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Multi Matrix Multi Matrix On Off Turns the multi matrix correction Makes settings related function on or off to multi matrix Area Indication On Off Turns on or off the function that correction Multi matrix correction allows specific colors to be selected for saturation correction in a 16 axis hue space displays a zebra pattern in the color area targeted by multi matrix correction Color Detection Color detection screen Detects colors targeted by multi matrix correction Makes settings related to noise suppression noise compression
171. g or playback Lights in green Not lit e No SxS memory card is loaded An unusable card is loaded e An SxS memory card is loaded but the other slot is selected Handling SxS Memory Cards Buqooys b JejdeU 9 71 Bunooys p Je dBUD 72 To eject SxS memory cards 1 Open the cover and then press the EJECT button to release the lock and pull the button out Press the button once to release the lock 2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the card Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card is being accessed Doing so may corrupt all data recorded on the card Always make sure that the ACCESS lamp is lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A and slot B you can press the SLOT SELECT button to select the SxS memory card to use Handling SxS Memory Cards The camcorder switches automatically to the other card if the selected card becomes full during recording The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback Even when pressed it does not change the selected slot Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen see page 93 is displayed Formatting Initializing SxS Memory Cards When you load an unformatted memory card load a memory card that has been formatted to other specification
172. g ring and the viewfinder barrel Then insert the eyepiece into the viewfinder barrel 3 Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its LOCK arrow points at the red mark on the viewfinder barrel When the eyecup is worn out replace it with a new one For details of a replacement eyecup contact a Sony service representative Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and Screen To adjust the viewfinder focus Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest Diopter adjustment ring To adjust the viewfinder screen Adjust the brightness contrast and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below DISPLAY ZEBRA TALLY Le N one HIGH PZN OFF e OFF pO vovet ow p ASPECT PEAKING control CONTRAST control BRIGHT control Attaching the Viewfinder SUONEJIEdOSId Z 19 dBUD 41 Setting the Area of Use time the camcorder you need to set this item You cannot use the camcorder without setting this item suoleledeld gsajdeyo To set the area of use POWER switch MENU knob 1 Set the POWER switch to the ON position The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder INITIAL SETTING 42 Setting the Area of Use When using the camcorder for the first The area of use is not factory preset Before using 2 Press the MENU knob The settings for selectable areas of use are displayed INI
173. gs and status information related to recording and playback ASSIGN Names of functions assigned SWITCH status to assignable switches BATTERY Status of the battery mounted MEDIA status on the camcorder and the media status To display status screens With no menu is displayed press the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST side Each push selects the next status screen in the order given in the table above CAMERA status screen This screen displays settings and status information related to shooting CAMERA White Bal B 1200K Gain L 0dB A 4700K M 9dB PRST 3200K H 18dB Zebra 1 On 70 Zoom Speed 70 Skin Detail DOFF 2 off White Bal White balance status Gain GAIN switch status Zoom Speed Zoom speed set with the lens ZOOM button Zebra Zebra status Skin Detail Skin details status AUDIO status screen This screen displays settings and status information related to audio input and output AUDIO Front MIC Stereo CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 Audio level meters and input sources Wind Filter Wind filter settings VIDEO status screen This screen displays settings and status information related to recording and playback VIDEO Video Format Rec Mode Output amp i LINK HD 1080 59 94i HD 422 50 HD Disable SDI Output Off Down Converter Squeeze Video Format Video format Rec Mode Recording bit rate HD mode only Output amp i LINK Output amp i LINK setting a
174. gs for the current situation Setting data is saved in the following categories User files User files save customized USER menu setting items and setting data You can save up to 64 user files on SXS memory cards and on USB flash drives in UDF mode You can set up the USER menu to a customized state by reading one of these files into the unit s memory ALL files ALL files save the setting data of all menus You can save up to 64 ALL files on an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode Device specific data shading output levels and other data that requires adjustment for the specific device is not saved Scene files Scene file save adjustments to PAINT menu items for the purpose of shooting a particular scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder s internal memory and up to 64 scene files on an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode Reference files Reference files save the reference values that are set when you execute FILE gt Scene gt Standard in the setup menu You can save one reference file in the camcorder s internal memory and one on an SxS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode Lens files Lens files save the setting data used to compensate for lens characteristics such as flare white shading white balance and center markers You can save up to 32 lens Saving and Loading Settings files in the camcorder s internal memory and up to 64 lens files on an S
175. he i LINK status indication area see page 35 on the viewfinder screen Indication Status of the external device STBY KBW In HDV recording standby REC im In HDV recording STBY iD In DV recording standby REC DO In DV recording Operation may be different depending on the type of external device When you execute the operation to make a recording on the recording media loaded in the camcorder while HDYV signals are output from the i LINK HDV DV connector HDV signal output stops for about one second before the recording starts and then it resumes While you can record shot marks on the memory card during recording they are not added to the pictures recorded on the external device Connecting an External Device i LINK Connection sedlneq Eul8 X GUND8UU09 g lajdeUQD 177 sedlneq eule Xq Bunoeuu0g g lajdEUD 178 Nonlinear Editing You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear editing system connected via the i LINK HDV DV connector The i LINK HDV DV connector of this camcorder is a 6 pin connector Check the number of pins of the i LINK connector on your computer and use an appropriate i LINK cable In searching pictures of this camcorder on the computer it may take some time until the display is reflected on the computer If the playback clip is short or the playback starting point is near the end of the clip the i LINK signal may be interrupted between the clip and the ne
176. hes between 4 3 and 16 9 aspect ratios for viewfinder screen display DISPLAY When the marker indication is enabled with the camcorder the marker indication on the viewfinder screen turns on and off every time you push the switch up to this position Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M8IAJ8AO lajdeUQ9 29 MGIAJ8AQ Ja deyD 30 ASPECT Each push of the switch down to this position toggles the mask display on and off Make mask display settings using OPERATION gt Marker gt Aspect Mask in the setup menu see page 122 Viewfinder cable Microphone holder CBK VF01 Viewfinder Optional Plug Connect to the VF connector 26 pin on the camcorder Stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side Eyecup Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal focus adjustment Eyepiece You can raise this up when required by the situation Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls g Viewfinder barrel You can raise this up or rotate when required by the situation Tally indicator Lights up when recording is started by a press of the REC START button on this camcorder the VTR button on the lens or the VTR button on the remote control unit When an abnormality occurs the tally indicator flashes to indicate a warning E PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness and makes focusing easie
177. his button to display the thumbnail screen see page 93 and to carry out a thumbnail operation Press once more to return to the original display SET set button and arrow buttons Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings and for thumbnail screen operations see page 100 When the menu is displayed press this button to select an item or to confirm the setting change MENU button Each press of this button turns the setup menu display on and off The function of this button is the same as that of the MENU ON OFF switch F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator The operating mode is set as explained below depending on the position of the switch F RUN Timecode keeps advancing regardless of whether the camcorder is recording Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with external timecode SET Sets the timecode or user bits R RUN Timecode advances only during recording Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the recording media M8IAJ8AO Je deuD For details see Setting the Timecode page 64 and Setting the User Bits page 65 EK LEVEL CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 audio channel 1 2 3 4 recording level knobs Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 2 3 and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1 CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3 4 switches are set to MANUAL AUDIO SELECT CH 3 4 audio channel 3 4
178. imited For the most effective correction execute the APR function Vertical smear When an extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Monitor screen Vertical tails shown on the image Bright object e g strong spotlight strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Fragmentation If pictures cannot be recorded reproduced properly try formatting the recording medium While repeating picture recording playback with a certain recording medium for an extended period files in the medium may be fragmented disabling proper recording storage In such a case make a backup of clips in the medium then perform formatting of the medium using OPERATION gt Format Media see page 115 in the setup menu Important Notes on Operation xlpueddy 191 xlpueddy 192 Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock The camcorder s internal clock is powered by a lithium battery If the message BackUp Battery End appears in the viewfinder this battery must be exchanged Contact a Sony service representative Specifications General Power requirements 12 V DC 11 V to 17 0 V Power consumption Approx 27 W main unit only during recording with the LCD monitor lit e Do not use a vid
179. in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the following places e In excessive heat or cold operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 C 122 F e In damp or dusty locations Locations where the camcorder may be exposed to rain e Locations subject to violent vibration e Near strong magnetic fields e Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields n direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this camcorder can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this camcorder be powered off Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly as otherwise damage may result Be sure to refer to the section Mounting and Adjusting the Lens page 43 Viewfinder Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder About the LCD panels The LCD panel fitted to this camcorder is manufactured with high precision technology giving a functioning pixel ratio
180. inds of flowers occupies most of the frame area When the subject is under a light source of extremely high or extremely low color temperature If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW function takes an unacceptably long time or only results in an inadequate effect then execute the AWB function MENU ON OFF switch To use this switch open the cover This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen Each time the switch is pushed down the menu screen is turned on and off The function of this switch is the same as that of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen operations section This switch has different functions depending on whether or not a menu is displayed MENU CANCEL PRST preset ESCAPE switch To use the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch open the cover It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the cover Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Use the switch in the following way when the menu is not displayed CANCEL PRST Each time this switch is pushed upward a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen see page 68 The window consists of five pages which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward Each page is displayed for about 10 seconds ESCAPE To clear the page immediately after display push this switch down to the OFF position Use the switch in the followi
181. information appear No video image appears If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed the duration of the selected clip is divided into fractions and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display expand function For an HD recorded MP4 clip its duration is divided into 12 If an SD recorded AVI clip comprises multiple files the divisions are displayed for the individual files Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls For MP4 clips each time you press this button the division is repeated Hold down the SHIFT button and press this button to step back through the division process HOLD display hold button Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the LCD monitor The timecode generator continues running Pressing this button again releases the hold For details of the counter display see page 28 RESET RETURN button Resets the value shown in the time counter display in the LCD monitor According to the settings of the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch see page 24 and the F RUN SET R RUN switch see page 23 this button resets the display as follows Settings of switches To reset DISPLAY switch COUNTER Counter to 0 00 00 00 DISPLAY switch TC Timecode to PRESET REGEN CLOCK _ 00 00 00 00 switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET DISPLAY switch U BIT User bits data to PRESET REGEN CLOCK 00000000 switch PRESE
182. ing metadata to set shot marks you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 When you record shot marks you can add the shot mark name strings defined in the planning metadata Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the camcorder Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 and Shot Mark 0 can be recorded by operation from a computer which is connected with the camcorder via Wi Fi Shot mark name string example Use a text editor to modify the fields in the lt Meta name gt tag The shaded fields in the example are essence mark name strings Names can be either in ASCII format up to 32 characters or UTF 8 format up to 16 characters sp indicates a space and indicates a carriage return If a name string contains even one non ASCII character the maximum length of that string is 16 characters lt xmlspversion 1 0 pencoding UTF 8 gt e4 lt PlanningMetadata xmlns http xmlns sony net pro metadata planningmetadata assignid H00123 spcreationDate 2011 04 15T08 00 00Z splastUpdate 201 1 04 15T15 00 002 version 1 00 gt 4 lt Properties propertyId assignment class original update 2011 04 15T15 00 00Z sp modifiedBy Chris gt lt lt Title pusAscii Football Game xml lang en gt Football Game 15 04 2011 lt Tide gt lt Meta pname _ShotMark1 p content G6AH gt lt Meta name _ShotMark2 content Biog gt lt Metaspname _ShotMark3 p content
183. ing received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT The setting range varies depending on the transmitter TX LCF Frequency Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT The setting range varies depending on the transmitter TX System Delay Auto 0 0ms to 8 0ms Specifies the amount of audio delay Auto Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless transmitter is zero 0 0ms to 8 0ms Sets the amount of anticipated wireless system delay for cases in which several wireless systems are being used over a devices such as an audio mixer Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Timecode TC Out Makes settings related to timecode Auto Generator Selects the source for timecode output Auto During recording output values generated by the timecode generator and during playback output values obtained by the timecode reader Generator Output values generated by the timecode generator during both recording and playback DF NDF DF NDF When the Country setting is other than PAL Area selects drop frame mode DF or non drop frame mode NDF LTC UBIT Fix Time Specifies the data recorded in LTC user bits Fix Record user specified data Time Record the current time Counter Display Counter Du
184. inimum illumination 0 016 Ix F1 4 42 dB 16 frame accumulation Video S N 54 dB Noise Suppress Off 59 dB Noise Suppress On Display LCD monitor Screen size 8 8 cm diagonal 3 5 inch Horizontal resolution 1000TV lines or more Modulation 45 or more 27 5 MHz at screen center Black level 3 1 when Black in the setup menu is set to 0 Gain 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 dB AGC Shutter speed 59 94i P 50i P 1 60 to 999 sec 29 97P 140 to 1000 sec 25P 13 to 11000 sec 23 94P 35 to 1 2000 sec Slow shutter 2 to 8 16 frames Dynamic range 600 460 1080 29 97P 1080 25P 1080 23 98P Smear 135 dB Audio Block Sampling frequency 48 kHz Quantization 16 bits 24 bits Headroom 20 dB the factory default setting 20 18 16 12 dB EBU Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz within 3 dB Dynamic range 90 dB typical Distortion 0 08 max with input level 40 dBu Built in speaker 194 Specifications Aspect ratio 16 9 Picture elements 640 H x 3 x 480 V Sequence delta Transmission system Hybrid semi transmissive type Media Block Card slots Type Express Card34 Number of slots 2 Connector Conforms to PCMCIA Express Card Standard Writing rate 50 Mbps or more Reading rate 50 Mbps or more Inputs Outputs Input Output connectors Signal i
185. ion in the recorder Action to take module There is no clip to be Recording continues displayed WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining S tj Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take O module z There is no clip with Recording continues the OK mark s WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining ET i aa F E Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take z e module ae 2777 The card has already Recording continues Replace the card in slot A with another one E clips having the same disallowing copy F S name as that you tried n to duplicate WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take E module The memory card Recording stops Make a backup copy and replace the card with 4 comes to the end of its another one as soon as possible Recording E service life playback may not be performed properly if you continue to use the card For details refer to the Operating Instructions of the memory card Unsupported Clip Included Media Reached Rewriting Limit by this camcorder WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining z z 5 Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take S module 2 The inserted memory The card in slot A cannot be used with this 4 card contains clips camcorder recorded in a forma
186. ion is assigned to an assignable switch Electrical 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for CC lt B gt 6300K when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch Electrical 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for CC lt C gt 6300K when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch Select if you do not want to use C Electrical 3200K 4300K 5600K Selects the color temperature for CC lt D gt 6300K when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch Select if you do not want to use D Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 149 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 150 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description DCC Adjust DCC Function Select DCC Fix Makes settings related to DCC dynamic contrast control Enables or disables automatic knee point adjustment when the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to CAM DCC ON DCC Automatically adjust the knee point according to the luminance of the subject Fix Set the knee point to a fixed value Specifies the dynamic range when the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to CAM DCC ON Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point DCC D Range 400 450 500 550 600 DCC Point 99 to 0 to 99 DCC Gain 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies gain with respect to the DCC detected value DCC De
187. ional editing software that corresponds to the recording formats used with this camcorder is required Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your computer in advance using the supplied application software Some editing software may not operate properly Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to the recording formats used with this camcorder Connecting an External Device i LINK Connection FAT You can record the same images as those recorded on the memory card in this camcorder on an external device connected to the i LINK HDV DV connector or record the playback picture of the external device on the memory card in the camcorder When you connect the camcorder to a non linear editing system that supports HDV format you can edit the images recorded on the memory card in the camcorder i LINK connection is available only in FAT mode e Use the i LINK HDV DV connector only for one to one i LINK connection When you change a setting which affects output signals from the i LINK HDV DV connector such as HD SD HD System Line System Frequency and Rec Format under OPERATION gt Format in the setup menu or i LINK I O and Down Converter under OPERATION gt Input Output in the setup menu disconnect the i LINK cable and change the setting Changing such a setting with the i LINK cable connected may cause improper operation of the connected i LINK device The external signal input via the i LINK
188. is required to fit the WRR 862 For details contact your vendor or a Sony service representative To fit the DWR S01D or WRR 855S Remove the four fixing screws holding the cover of the portable tuner receiver housing slot located in the rear of the camcorder to remove the cover 2 Insert the DWR S01D or WRR 855S into the housing slot and fasten the four fixing screws DWR S01D or WRR 855S 3 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to which you want to input audio signal to WIRELESS see page 24 SUONEJIEdSId Z 19 dBUD To fit the WRR 862 when using a BP L80S Battery Pack T Attach the WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 B to the back of the camcorder Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting For three of these screws insert the screwdriver through the corresponding hole and tighten the screw Make sure that all four screws are fully tightened Loosen the adjustment screws on the tuner fitting Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP L80S Battery Pack to be attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 862 About the WRR tuner fitting service part number A 8278 057 B contact a Sony service or sales representative Preparing the Audio Input System 47 suoleledeld gsajdeyo 48 BP L80S Adjustment screws Mount plate sup
189. is setting cannot be turned on Safety Area 80 90 92 5 95 Selects the safety zone range Aspect Marker Line Mask Off When an aspect marker is to be displayed selects the display method Select Off if you do not want to display the marker Line Show as white lines Mask Display by lowering the video signal level of areas outside the marker range Aspect Select 15 9 14 9 13 9 4 3 1 66 1 1 85 1 2 35 1 2 4 1 Selects the aspect ratio of the marker Menu List sBunjes poleje pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 121 sBumes pelrejeq pue nusy 9 se deyo 122 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Marker Makes settings related to marker display in the viewfinder screen 100 Marker On Off Turns the 100 safety zone display on or off When three of Center Marker Safety Zone User Box and Guide Frame are set to On this setting cannot be turned on Aspect Mask 0 to 30 to 90 10 step When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask specifies the video signal level of areas outside the marker range as a percentage value relative to the video signal level of areas inside the marker range User Box On Off Turns the box cursor display on or off When three of Center Marker Safety Zone Guide Frame and 100 Marker are set to On this setting cannot be turned on User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Specifies the box cursor width distanc
190. isplayed in Makes settings related Name the list box that appears when a file to ALL file operations is saved or loaded All Load SxS Execute Cancel Loads an ALL file from an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute All Save SxS Execute Cancel Stores an ALL file to an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute All Load USB Execute Cancel Loads an ALL file from a USB flash in UDF mode only drive execute by selecting Execute All Save USB Execute Cancel Stores an ALL file to a USB flash in UDF mode only drive execute by selecting Execute File ID Assigns a name to a file Names can be up to 16 characters in length All Preset Execute Cancel Returns all items to their preset values execute by selecting Execute Store All Preset Execute Cancel Stores the current settings of all items as the preset values execute by selecting Execute Clear All Preset Execute Cancel Clears the preset values of all items execute by selecting Execute 3Sec Clr Preset On Off Turns on or off the function that clears each preset value when the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch is pushed up and held for three seconds on the CANCEL PRST side Network Data Off On Selects whether to load On or not load Off network settings when loading an ALL file sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD Menu List 157 FILE Menu
191. it is powered off but the setting for the number of frames setting is maintained You do not need to set it again the next time you shoot in Frame Rec mode To shoot in Frame Rec mode Make the settings and preparations described in Basic Operations page 76 secure the camcorder so that it does not move and begin shooting When recording starts the Frame Rec indication in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit and FRM REC and FRM STB Y appear alternatively at the position of the REC indication The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording Advanced Operations Buqooys b Jejdey 9 83 Bunooys p Je dBUD 84 To stop shooting Stop the recording When shooting ends the video data stored in memory up to that point is written to the media To exit Interval Rec mode Do one of the following Set the POWER switch to OFF With the camcorder in recording standby mode set OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off Limitations during recording The i LINK HDV DV connector cannot be used Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always R RUN e Audio cannot be recorded Recording review is not possible e If you press the SLOT SELECT button the camcorder completes recording of the specified number of
192. itches you can also switch between the color temperatures assigned to each position from a RM B150 B170 B750 Remote Control Unit Select MAINTENANCE gt White Filter in the setup menu see page 149 2 Select the position to which to assign a CC filter by selecting one of Electrical CC lt A gt to Electrical CC lt D gt and then turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature As you turn the MENU knob the color temperature changes as follows 3200K lt gt 4300K lt gt 5600K lt gt 6300K Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance To set no color temperature Select with Electrical CC lt C gt or lt D gt selected When the assignable switch is pressed the setting for that position is not displayed For example if is set for one position then switching between the remaining three positions is carried out 3 Repeat step 2 as required Assign the electrical CC filter switching function ELECTRICAL CC to an assignable switch see page 164 White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted even when the camcorder power is turned off The camcorder has two white balance memories A and B You can automatically save adjustment values for each ND filter in the memory that corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting A or B The camcorder has four built in ND filters allowing you to save a total of eight adjustmen
193. item of the OPERATION menu you can assign user specified functions to the ASSIGN 0 to 3 switches the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches the COLOR TEMP button and the RET button on the lens The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory Switch or button Function Assignable SW setting ASSIGN 0 switch No assignment Off ASSIGN I switch No assignment Off ASSIGN 2 switch No assignment Off ASSIGN 3 switch No assignment Off ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off RET button During recording or playback Write a shot mark Lens RET In the other states Conduct a recording review if playback is allowed COLOR TEMP button Adjust the white balance with the preset white Color Temp SW 5600K balance value of 5600K Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 0 Switch Assignable switch setting Function is next powered on State when camcorder Off No assignment Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off Setting retained ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW auto tracking white balance mode Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off Setting retained Freeze Mix Execute the freeze mix function Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off Setting not retained Zebra Turn zebra display on or off Setting n
194. items Sub item Settings Description Scene LI Standard File number and file ID Makes settings related 2 Standard File number and file ID O file operations STI Standard File number and file ID 14 Standard File number and file ID LS Standard File number and file ID IStandard Standard settings Display Mode Date amp Time Model Selects the items to be displayed in Name the list box that appears when a file is saved or loaded Scene Recall Mem _ Execute Cancel Loads a file from internal memory execute by selecting Execute Scene Store Mem Execute Cancel Stores a file in internal memory execute by selecting Execute Scene Recall SxS Execute Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute Scene Store SxS Execute Cancel Stores a file to an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute Scene Recall USB Execute Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute Scene Store USB Execute Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute File ID Assigns a name to a file Names can be up to 16 characters in length Reference Reference Store Execute Cancel Stores the current settings of Makes settings related reference file items in the reference to reference file file that is maintained in internal Operations memory execute by selecting Q Execute S Reference Clear Execute Cance Clear the reference file execute by z selecti
195. ivers plug ins and application software where applicable from the Sony Professional products web site Sony Professional products web site homepage U S A http pro sony com Canada http www sonybiz ca Latin America _http sonypro latin com Europe Middle East and Africa http www pro sony eu Japan http www sonybsc com Asia Pacific http pro sony asia com Korea http bp sony co kr China http pro sony com cn Using the CD ROM manual The manual can be read on a computer with Adobe Reader installed You can download Adobe Reader free from the Adobe website 1 Open the index htm file in the CD ROM 2 Select and click on the manual that you want to read If you have lost or damaged the CD ROM you can purchase a new one from your Sony representative Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Power Supply Adaptor connector see page 16 LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector see page 17 is turned on and off AUTO When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording MANUAL You can turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache mode it is not possible to turn on the light before operation to start recording is carried out or while data is being stored in memory POWER swi
196. ix to a user specified string of characters four to 46 characters in length A Basic Operations Buqooys b JejdeU 9 77 Bunooys p Je dBUD 78 user specified prefix cannot be changed after recording The four digit number at the end of clip names is generated automatically counting up in order as clips are recorded Playing Recorded Clips When the camcorder is in standby STBY mode you can play all or part of the most recently recorded clip see page 77 T Insert the SxS memory card to play see page 71 2 Press the PREV button see page 22 or the F REV button see page 21 to cue up the clip to play 3 Press the PLAY PAUSE button The PLAY PAUSE indicator lights and the playback picture appears in the viewfinder To pause the playback Press the PLAY PAUSE button The PLAY PAUSE indicator flashes during pause Press the button again to return to playback mode To play at high speed Press the F FWD button see page 22 or the F REV button see page 21 To return to normal playback press the PLAY PAUSE button To switch between memory cards When two memory cards are loaded press the SLOT SELECT button see page 25 to select the active slot It is not possible to switch between memory cards during playback To end playback Press the STOP button Playback stops and the camcorder enters E E mode Press the THUMBNAIL button Playback stops and a thumbnail screen see page 93 appe
197. k item appears in the THUMBNAIL menu when you have selected a clip that has an OK mark 1 In the thumbnail screen select THUMBNAIL gt Delete OK Mark The screen changes to the clip properties screen and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture Thumbnail Operations suonesedo dio G se deyp 103 suolyesedo dijo G lJ8 dEUJ 104 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The OK mark is deleted from the selected clip To delete an OK NG or KP mark UDF 1 m the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip from which you want to delete an OK NG or KP mark and select THUMBNAIL gt Set Clip Flag gt None The screen changes to the clip properties screen and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The mark selected in step 2 is added to the selected clip Protecting Clips UDF When the recording mode is UDF you can protect a selected clip or all clips Protected clips cannot be deleted or divided To protect a clip 1 In the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip which you want to protect and select THUMBNAIL gt Lock Clip The screen changes to the clip properties screen and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The selected clip is protected To protect all clips 1 In the thumbnail screen select THUMBNA
198. l of the detection area E External input source Indicates the type of external input signal HDV to be recorded Recording of external input Indicates EXT when an external input is recorded Electric color temperature filter Appears when the CC 5600K function is set to on Filter position Indicates the currently selected ND filter position number see page 18 When ELECTRICAL CC is assigned to an assignable switch the electrical filter position A B C D appears to the right of the ND filter position 1 to 4 as shown on the previous page White balance memory Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory ATW ATW Auto Tracing White Balance mode W A Memory A mode W B Memory B mode W P Preset mode 3200 When the assignable switch to which Color Temp SW 3200K has been assigned is on 4300 When the assignable switch to which Color Temp SW 4300K has been assigned is on 5600 When the assignable switch to which Color Temp SW 5600K has been assigned is on 6300 When the assignable switch to which Color Temp SW 6300K has been assigned is on Gain value Indicates the gain value in dB of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN selector Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M8IAJ8AO Je deuD 35 M8IAJ8AO J deUuD 36 Recording status indication When the Rec Status Indicator item of the Operation menu is set to Viewfinder or Both gt marks
199. l Files Enable Disable When USB gt Copy All Clips is set to Execute all the data under the General folder is copied at the same time with Enable selected a When the optional CBK HD02 is installed 132 Menu List b When the CBK VFO1 is used c When an HDVF series viewfinder is used PAINT Menu Settings in bold are the factory default values PAINT Menu items Sub item Settings Description Switch Status Gamma On Off Turns gamma correction on or off Turns various signal Black Gamma On Off Turns black gamma correction on or correction functions off and a test signal on or off Matrix On Off Turns linear matrix correction and user matrix correction on or off Knee On Off Turns knee correction on or off White Clip On Off Turns white clip correction on or off Detail On Off Turns detail correction on or off Aperture On Off Turns aperture correction on or off Flare On Off Turns flare correction on or off Test Saw On Off Turns the test saw signal on or off White Color Temp lt A gt 1500K to 3200K to Displays the white balance color Sets the color 50000K temperature saved in memory A temperature and Color Temp BAL 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance gain performs manual white 3 balance adjustment lt A gt values saved in memory A linked R gain and B gain R Gain lt A gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the white balance R gain
200. l timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode User bit settings during timecode synchronization When the timecode is synchronized only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value To release the timecode synchronization First disconnect the external timecode then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camcorder synchronization during timecode synchronization During timecode synchronization the camcorder is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector Setting Shot Data While color bars are output shot data can be displayed PMW 500 1 AUG 25 10 1 12345678901 Example display of shot data You can select which shot data is superimposed on the color bars with OPEARTION gt Shot Display in the setup menu Shot Date To superimpose the shot date turn the MENU knob to set Shot Date to On and press the knob Shot Time To superimpose the shot time turn the MENU knob to set Shot Time to On and press the knob Shot Model Name To superimpose the model name turn the MENU knob to set Shot Model Name to On and press
201. lay Time 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the DCC control speed speed of reaction to changes in the video DCC Peak Filter 99 to 0 to 99 Adjusts response sensitivity with respect to peaks in DCC detected values Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Auto Iris2 Makes settings related to auto iris Iris Window 1 2 3 4 5 6 Var Selects the type of iris detection window Var Variable Iris Window Ind On Off Turns on or off the function that displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window Iris Level 09 to 0 to 99 Adjusts the level of the auto iris target value Iris APL Ratio 99 to 0 to 99 Adjusts the mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and average value available when OPERATION gt TLCS gt Mode is set to Standard Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the width of the detection window when the setting of Iris Window is VAR Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Adjusts the height of the detection window when the setting of Iris Window is VAR Iris Var H Position 479 to 0 to 479 Specifies the horizontal position of the detection window when the setting of Iris Window is VAR Iris Var V Position 464 to 0 to 464 Specifies the vertical position of the detection window when the setting of Iris Window is VAR Iris Speed 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the
202. lay mode other than STATUS When the operation finishes and the Freeze Mix function is activated the same picture appears on the viewfinder screen The play picture cannot be switched to the camera picture when playing a clip that was recorded with a number of system lines or a system frequency that differs from the current settings of this camcorder The output from the HD SD SDI OUT connector and the VIDEO OUT connector may freeze momentarily when the output is switched between the play picture and the camera picture Deleting Recorded Clips You can use the assignable switches to delete the last recorded clips Last Clip DEL function You can also use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete all recorded clips All Clips DEL function or to delete selected clips For details see Deleting Clips page 105 Tum onthe assignable switch to which the Last Clip DEL function has been assigned see page 162 A confirmation message appears 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Advanced Operations Recording Shot Marks UDF FAT HD On this camcorder two types of shot marks are available in HD mode You can record them at user specified positions to make it easier for editors to cue up those positions The maximum numbers of shot marks per clip vary according to file formats File format Maximum number MP4 127 MXF 999 Shot marks cannot be recorded in SD mode
203. listed below e BP L80S Lithium ion Battery Pack AC power using the AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer When you dispose of the battery you must obey the law in the relative area or country Using a Battery Pack When a BP L80S Battery Pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for approximately 145 minutes Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack and the ambient temperature when used Before use charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery For details on the battery charging procedure refer to the battery charger operation manual Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged To attach the battery pack 1 Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder SUONEJEdSId Z 18 dBUDJ BP L80S Align these lines 2 Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow points at the matching line on the camcorder LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder If the battery pack is not attached correctly the terminal may be damaged To detach the
204. ls for Solid State Memory Camcorder Using the Shoulder Strap To attach the shoulder strap Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting Pull up the strap to lock the fitting 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1 To remove the shoulder strap Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release Using the Shoulder Strap SUONEJEdSId Z 19 dBUDJ 51 suoneledejd z J9 dey9 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth within a 40 mm range This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder Shoulder pad 1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position 52 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position EEJ Adjustments and Settings For menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 Setting the Video Format The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system frequency suas pue sluewisnfpy g se deyo In UDF mode UDF OPERATION gt Fo
205. may not be possible to adjust the lens iris If this happens the black balance will be incorrect Adjusting the White Balance 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown below GAIN switch L set to a gain value that is as small as possible e OUTPUT DCC switch CAM e WHITE BAL switch A or B P 1 Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when OPERATION gt White Setting gt White Switch lt B gt in the setup menu is set to Memory Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions as follows Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHITE and then release the switch The message Executing appears during execution and changes to OK color temperature of subject when the adjustment finishes The adjustment values are saved automatically in the memory selected in step 1 A or B If the camcorder has a zoom lens with an automatic iris
206. me and input voltage on or off Media Remain On Off Turns the indication of the remaining media capacity on or off TLCS Mode On Off Turns the indication of the TLCS operating mode on or off Focus Mode On Off Turns the indication of the focus operating mode on or off White Balance On Off Turns the indication of the white Mode balance mode on or off Filter Position On Off Turns the indication of the ND filter setting on or off Iris Position On Off Turns the indication of the iris position on or off Gain Setting On Off Turns the indication of the gain setting on or off Shutter Setting On Off Turns the indications of the shutter mode and shutter speed on or off Color Temp On Off Turns the indication of the color temperature on or off Video Format On Off Turns the indication of the video format on or off System Line On Off Turns the indication of the system lines on or off Rec Mode On Off Turns the indication of special recording modes S amp Q Interval Frame Rec Picture Cache Rec on or off Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Display On Off Selects the items to Extender On Off Turns the lens extender indication on or off display in the viewfinder screen WRR RF Level On Off Turns the indication of the digital wireless receiver reception level on or off Clip Number PB On Off Turns the indication of clip information on or
207. mory card insert the card into a memory card slot and then proceed as follows See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations Select FILE gt User in the setup menu To assign a name to the data before saving it Assign a name before proceeding to step 2 For details see To assign names to files page 167 2 Select User Save SxS gt Execute A user file list box appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers File numbers with a file name or a date and time are the number of files that already contain data 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired file number 4 Press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the save select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the save select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you choose to execute the save the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section A completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out when the data has been saved Saving and Loading User Files eyeq Guqles sN Gulpeo pue Bunes 7 Jajdeup 171 gea Bunjes 1esf Guipeo pue Bunes 7 Jaydeyo 172 Saving the USER menu as a user file in which all menu settings are reset to the preset values Select Store User Preset gt Execute in step 2 When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75
208. mperature the offset to add to the white balance value in memory B Note that the error range becomes larger for higher offset color temperatures Adjust while viewing the actual video Warm Cool Balance lt B gt 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies a more precise color temperature for use when satisfactory video cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool lt B gt setting Shutter Makes settings related to the shutter setting Shutter Select Second Degree Specifies the unit used to select shutter speeds Second Select in units of seconds Degree Select in units of degrees Slow Shutter On Off Turns the SLS mode on or off SLS Frames 2Frames 3Frames 4Frames Frames 6Frames 7Frames 8Frames 16Frames Selects the number of accumulated frames in SLS mode Time Zone Specifies the time zone Zone 12 00 to 0 00 to 14 00 in steps of 30 minutes Specifies a difference from UTC Greenwich Mean Time in units of 30 minutes Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Clip Auto Naming In Fat mode Title Plan Selects the clip naming format Make settings for clip In UDF mode C C XDCAM standard name In name or clip Title Plan UDF mode only management Title Name specified by Title Prefix Do not assign clip names that begin with the period symbol Clips with names in which the first character is cannot be viewed on
209. nail screen UDF NG Displays the NG clip thumbnail screen KP Keep Displays the KP clip thumbnail screen None Displays the None clip clip which have been marked with an OK NG or KP mark thumbnail screen Lock All Clips Protects all clips displayed UDF Unlock All Clips Cancels protection of all clips displayed UDF Copy All All Clips Batch copies groups of clips files see page 105 General Files All Clips amp General Files Delete All Clips Execute Cancel Deletes all unprotected clips see page 105 Thumbnail Operations suonesado dio G 13 dey9 99 suoneiado dijo G sajdeyp 100 Basic THUMBNAIL Menu Operations See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations To display the THUMBNAIL menu 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen 2 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to ON or press the MENU button 3 Turn the MENU knob to select TH and then press the knob Or press the 4 or Iv button to select TH and then press the SET button The THUMBNAIL menu appears FAT THUMBNAIL p Set Index Picture a fg Thumbnail View Set Shot Mark Wa ff Add OK Mark Fi ff Delete OK Mark in FAT mode UDF THUMBNAIL Set Shot Mark JE Set Clip Flag Fi fj Lock Clip in UDF mode To hide the THUMBNAIL menu press the MENU button again To select menu items and sub items Do one of the following
210. nals e Control other i LINK devices Easily connect multiple devices with a single i LINK cable Your i LINK device is capable of connecting to a wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer and other operations Other advantages include the following feature When connected to multiple i LINK devices youri LINK device can perform data transfer and other operations not only with the directly connected devices but also with any of the devices that are connected to those devices Therefore you do not need to be concerned with device connection order However depending on the features and specifications of the connected devices you may need to use certain functions differently and you may not be able to transfer data or perform certain operations i LINK a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by Sony is a trademark supported by many companies worldwide IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc The camcorder can be connected to one device with the i LINK cable DV cable When you connect with an HDV or DV device that has two or more i LINK connectors refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the connected device About i LINK About data transfer speed of i LINK i LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100 200 and 400 Mbps D that are described as S100 S200 and S400 respectively For i LINK devices
211. nction Setting not retained Spotlight Turn the spotlight function in auto iris mode on or off Setting retained Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Backlight Turn the backlight function in auto iris mode on or off Setting retained EVF Mode Switch the viewfinder screen between B amp W On and Setting retained color Off BRT Disp Turn the display of the brightness level on or off Setting retained Histogram Turn the histogram display on or off Setting retained Lens Info Switch the depth of field indication between off Setting retained displayed in meters and displayed in feet Zoom Tele Wide When a lens that supports serial communication is installed assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 4 and assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5 displayed only when lt 4 gt and lt 5 gt are set Zoom Wide Tele When a lens that supports serial communication is installed assign the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 4 and assign the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5 displayed only when lt 4 gt and lt 5 gt are set Manual Focus Assist Turn the manual focus assist function on or off Setting retained Focus Mag Turn the focus magnification function on or off Setting not retained Zebra Turn zebra display on or off Setting not retained Lens RET Display return video signals when
212. nd i LINK usage status SDI Output HD SD SDI OUT connector output setting Down Converter SD output down converter setting HD mode only ASSIGN SWITCH status screen This screen displays the names of the functions assigned to assignable switches ASSIGN SWITCH 4 5 0 Off RET Return Video Freeze Mix C Temp Color Temp SW5600K Off Color Temp SW3200K Rec Review Off Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information Status Screens BATTERY MEDIA status screen This screen displays the status of the battery mounted on the camcorder and the media status BATTERY MEDIA 5 5 Battery W M EEEE Charge Count 55 m HDDB MEEEEEECOCOO 0 50 100 Media A BM MOOOOOOO 120min Life 100 MediaB MM MOOOOOOCO 50min Life 33 0 50 100 Battery The remaining battery capacity Charge Count The number of times the battery has been charged HDD A HDD B Remaining battery capacity of PHU 220R in FAT mode Media A Media B e Remaining capacity of media Recordable time e Approximate writable lifetime Life Life 100 is shown for unused media Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information Status Screens suas pue sjuswjsnipy g ls deUD 69 Bunooys p Je dBUD 70 Shooting Handling SxS Memory Cards This camcorder records video and audio on SxS memory cards not supplied loaded into one or both of its memory card slots You can use the camcorder with the following devices to make recording
213. ng Execute z Refer Load SxS Execute Cance Load a reference file from an SxS 2 memory card execute by selecting 5 Execute ed Refer Save SxS Execute Cance Store a reference file to an SxS 5 memory card execute by selecting a Execute g Refer Load USB Execute Cancel Loads a file from a USB flash drive 0 in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute Refer Store USB Execute Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive a in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute File ID Assigns a name to a file Names can be up to 16 characters in length Scene White Data On Off Selects whether to load On or not load Off white balance data when Scene gt Scene Recall or Scene gt Standard is executed 158 Menu List FILE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Lens Display Mode Date amp Time Model Selects the items to be displayed in Makes settings related Name the list box that appears when a file to lens file operations is saved or loaded Lens Recall Mem Execute Cancel Loads a file from internal memory execute by selecting Execute Lens Store Mem Execute Cance Stores a file in internal memory execute by selecting Execute Lens Recall SxS Execute Cancel Loads a file from an SxS memory card execute by selecting Execute Lens Store SxS Execute Cance Stores a file to an SXS memory card execute by selecting Execute Lens Recall USB Execute Cance Loads a file fr
214. ng a Shooting and Recording System sedlneq EU19 X GUND8UU09 g lajdEUD 179 soueuajuley 6 Ja deyD 180 chapter O Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by recording and playing back video and audio signals Testing the Camcorder Maintenance Cleaning the Viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Never use organic solvents such as thinners Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning example HDVF 20A Viewfinder barrel Eyecup holder Protecting filter Packing ring Eyecup 1 Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel For the detaching procedure see Detaching the Eyepiece on page 40 2 Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder 3 Remove the protecting filter together with the packing ring from inside the eyecup holder 4 Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring Fog proof filter Depending on the temperature and humidity the protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear replace the protecting filter with a fog proof filter service part number 1 547 341 11 Fitting the fog proof filter Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the fog proof filter Be sure to correctly assemble
215. ng is 1080 and the Country setting is PAL Area e When the HD SD setting is SD and the Country setting is PAL Area 59 94P 29 97P 23 98P When the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 720 and the Country setting is other PAL Area han 50P 25P When the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 720 and the Country setting is PAL Area 59 94i 29 97P When the HD SD setting is SD and the Country setting is other than PAL Area Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Format Rec Format The available settings Selects the recording format execute by Specifies the vary depending on the selecting Execute camcorder s settings in UDF FAT HD operating mode and SD HD System Line and recording format System Frequency HD422 50 When the UDF FAT setting is UDF HD420 HQ1920 the HD SD setting is HD the HD HD420 HQ1440 System Line setting is 1080 HD422 50 When the UDF FAT setting is UDF HD420 HQ1280 the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 720 When the System Frequency setting is 25P or 29 97P this setting is fixed to HD422 50 HQ 1920 HQ 1440 When the UDF FAT setting is FAT the HD SD setting is HD the HD System Line setting is 1080 and the System Frequency setting is 29 97P or 25P HQ 1920 HQ 1440 When the UDF FAT setting is FAT the SP 1440 HD
216. ng mode is FAT HD mode DV AVI When the recording mode is FAT SD mode System frequency Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played or recorded 59 94i 29 97P 23 98P 50i 25P 59 94P SOP M Status display PB Appears during play NDF Appears when non drop frame timecode is selected EXT LK Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN timecode input connector HOLD Appears when the operation mode of the internal timecode generator is set to R RUN and stopped Audio format Indicates the audio recording format or the audio format of clip being currently played Indication Status Recording Recording format mode 16bit FAT Any format UDF e HD420 HQ DVCAM e IMX Audio Length is set tol6 bit 24bit UDF HD422 50 e IMX Audio Length is set to24 bit EJ Recording status indication When the Rec Status Indicator item of the Operation menu is set to LCD or Both gt marks are displayed as the recording proceeds 9 Audio level indicators Indicate the audio recording or play levels of channels 1 to 4 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Time counter display Switches displays of time counter values timecode and user bits data depending on the position of the DISPLAY switch Displays the type of data currently shown in the time counter as follows TCG Recorded timecode TCR Playback timecod
217. ng way when the menu is displayed CANCEL PRST Pushing this switch up to this position after a setting is changed in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are cancelled Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings Pushing this switch up to this position before a setting is changed in the setup menu or after a setting change is cancelled in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the setting is reset to the initial value Pushing this switch up to this position again resets the settings to the initial value ESCAPE Use this switch when the menu page which has a hierarchical structure is opened Each time the switch is pushed to this position the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy Cover Open this cover to use the MENU ON OFF switch or the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch Right side near the rear DISF SEL__HC LD s DISIJLAY RETURN COUNTER TC U BIT Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E D sound during recording and playback sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings see page 182 If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack the speaker output is suppressed automatically 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In E E mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing th
218. nput video is displayed on the viewfinder screen or the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT connector Audio signals are output through the built in speakers the headphones connected to the EARPHONE connector and the speakers of the monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT connector 3 Start the recording An error is generated in the following cases In such a case cancel Recording mode The video format of input signal does not match that specified on the camcorder A copy protected stream is being fed in If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during recording the TALLY indicators the tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication REC on the viewfinder screen flash indicating that no signal is being recorded on the SxS memory card When an input signal is resumed recording is restarted incrementing the clip number on the memory card Configuring a Shooting and Recording System If you install the optional CBK HDO2 on this camcorder you can attach the CA FB70 HD Camera Adaptor and connect the CA TX70 HD Camera Control Unit This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with camera extension units connected to a remote control unit For more information about the CA FB70 and CA TX70 refer to their respective operation manuals When using the camcorder in this system do not connect a video light to the camcorder Configuri
219. nputs GENLOCK IN BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q unbalanced TC IN BNC type 0 5 V to 18 Vp p 10 KQ AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 XLR type 3 pin female With automatic detection and switching function MIC 70 to 20 dBu LINE 4 0 3 dBu MIC IN XLR type 5 pin female 70 to 20 dBu WRR CH1 CH2 D sub 15 pin WRR analog 40 dBu WRR digital 40 dbFS HD SD SDI When an option is installed 4 channel audio Signal outputs VIDEO OUT BNC type switching between SD analog composite and HD Y HD SD SDI OUT 1 2 BNC type 0 8 Vp p unbalanced switching between HD and SD Complied to SMPTE292M 259M 4 channel audio CH1 to CH4 AUDIO OUT XLR type 5 pin male 4 0 3 dBu balanced TC OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 Q EARPHONE stereo minijack 8 Q 5 mW Others DC IN XLR type 4 pin male 11 to 17 VDC DC OUT 4 pin 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 0 5A LENS 12 pin Supplying power to the lens 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 10A REMOTE 8 pin LIGHT 2 pin USB 4 pin type A 4 pin type B i LINK HDV DV 6 pin complies with TEEE1394 Recommended Additional Equipment Option key SD Record and Playback Key CBK MDO1 Power supply and related equipment AC Adaptor AC DN10 DN2B Battery Pack BP L80S Battery Charger BC L160 L500 L70 Lens Viewfinder and Related Equipment Lens 214 type bayonet mount lenses only Viewfinder HDVF series viewfinder
220. ns 93 playing 78 96 protecting 104 proxy data 87 selecting 96 Clock setting 43 COLOR TEMP button 19 Color temperature 33 Connection 173 monitors 173 usingi LINK 177 CONTRAST control 29 30 Cover 20 xepul D Date setting 43 DC IN connector 16 DC OUT 12V connector 16 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control 19 Depth of field indication 33 Digital extender 32 Diopter adjustment ring 29 30 DISP SEL EXPAND button 22 DISPLAY switches 22 30 DISPLAY ASPECT switch 29 E EARPHONE jack 26 EJECT buttons 25 Electric color temperature filter 35 Index 203 xepul 204 ESSENCE MARK button 23 Essence mark thumbnail screen 107 Expand thumbnail screen displaying 106 to increase the number of divisions 107 Extender 32 External device connector 25 External devices 173 control 35 External input 35 External power source 33 Eyecup 29 30 F F FWD button indicator 22 F REV button indicator 21 Filter position 35 FILTER selector 18 Fitting for optional microphone holder 17 Flange focal length adjusting 44 Focus adjustment mode 34 position 32 Formatting 72 75 Frame Rec 83 Framing 78 86 Framing shots 86 Freeze Mix 86 F RUN SET R RUN switch 23 G GAIN selector 19 Gain value 35 GENLOCK IN connector 25 Green tally 32 Green tally indicator 31 H HD SD SDI OUT connector 27 Histogram 36 HOLD button 22 i LINK 198 cable 198 connection 177 Index i LINK HDV DV connector 27 Index picture 95 changing 108
221. nt to back viewfinder positioning levers and the front to back viewfinder positioning knobs and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward 2 Using a 2 5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench detach the viewfinder slide assembly Attaching the Viewfinder 39 suoleledeld z 18 1dEUD 4 Adjust the front to back position so that the arm of the BKW 401 does not touch the handle when it is raised Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle Bolts with hexagonal Viewfinder slide assembly 3 Attach the BKW 401 with the supplied bolts Detaching the Eyepiece Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen from further away It is also easy to remove dust from the viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is detached Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise to align the red marks on the locking ring and the viewfinder barrel Bolts supplied with the BKW 401 Locking ring Locking ring match mark Match mark on the viewfinder barrel 2 Detach the eyepiece Match mark on end of eyepiece 40 Attaching the Viewfinder T 1 You can also attach a commercially available protection filter close up lens etc that is 52 mm in diameter o reattaching the eyepiece Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the viewfinder barrel 2 Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with the red marks on the eyepiece lockin
222. nterval Rec mode To shoot in Interval Rec mode Make the settings and preparations described in Basic Operations page 76 secure the camcorder so that it does not move and begin shooting When recording starts the Interval indication in the viewfinder changes from flashing to lit and INT REC and INT STBY appear alternatively at the position of the REC indication The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording The green tally indicator in the viewfinder flashes at high frequencies If you are using the pre lighting function the video light comes on before recording starts To stop shooting Stop the recording When shooting ends the video data stored in memory up to that point is written to the media To exit Interval Rec mode Do one of the following Set the POWER switch to OFF e With the camcorder in recording standby mode set OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off Limitations during recording The i LINK HDV DV connector cannot be used e Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always F RUN e Audio cannot be recorded e Recording review is not possible If you press the SLOT SELECT button the camcorder completes recording of the specified number of frames creates a clip and switches t
223. ntinue the remaining settings repeat step 3 5 Making sure that SET is selected press the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 and 4 To cancel the setting Before executing step 5 push the MENU CANCEL PRST ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL PRST side Always power the camcorder off before mounting or removing a lens For information about using the lens refer to the operation manual for the lens The lens is supplied separately Lens mount securing rubber 5 T Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens Setting the Date Time of the Internal Clock Mounting and Adjusting the Lens suoljeredaig Z 19 dBUJ 43 suoneledejd z J9 deU9 44 If the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious accident Make sure the lens is firmly locked It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above R Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector 5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps If you have attached an aberration correction lens The aberration correction function is activated automatically Star
224. ntinues through all clips after the selected clip When the last clip has been played to the end the camcorder enters pause still image mode at the last frame of the last clip Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the thumbnail screen There may be momentary picture breakup or still image display at the transition from one clip to another During this time the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin playback there may be momentary picture breakup at the top of the clip To view the top of the clip without breakup put the camcorder into playback mode pause use the PREV button to return to the top of the clip and start play again On SxS memory cards that contain both HD mode and SD mode clips you cannot play all clips in sequence For example while an HD mode thumbnail screen is displayed only HD mode clips are played in sequence Clip Playback To pause play Press the PLAY PAUSE button The PLAY PAUSE indicator flashes while play is paused Press the button again to return to play mode To play at high speed Press the F FWD button see page 22 or the F REV button see page 21 To return to normal playback press the PLAY PAUSE button To stop play Press the STOP button Play stops and the camcorder enters E E mode Press the THUMBNAIL button Play stops and the thumbnail screen see page 93 appears in the viewfinder Pl
225. o static electricity or electric noise Do not use or store SxS memory cards in locations that are Outside the specified environmental ranges Very hot such in as vehicles parked in the sun during summer or exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters Subject to high humidity and corrosion When inserting a memory card insert with the label side facing the correct direction Carry and store SxS memory cards in their cases and lock the cases securely To use SxS 1 memory card SBS 32G1 in UDF mode the software may need to be updated For details access the Sony website closest to your area Refer to the top page of the CD ROM Manual on the supplied CD ROM Guard against accidents and inadvertent data loss by backing up the data stored on SxS memory cards Sony cannot be responsible for any consequences of damage to or loss of data stored on SxS memory cards Do not attach anything other than the supplied labels in the designated label space When attaching a label make sure it does not protrude beyond the label space ANOS sh e Label space e Use this camcorder to format SxS memory cards that will be used with this camcorder When memory cards are formatted on another unit the format is regarded as an invalid format making it necessary to format the memory cards again However note that the format and delete functions of this camcorder do not completely remove data from memory cards
226. o the following thumbnail search screens which allow you quickly find the clips you want Expand thumbnail screen e Essence mark thumbnail screen in HD mode only Like the normal thumbnail screen and the OK clip thumbnail screen these screens allow you to select clip thumbnails see page 96 and to start clip playback see page 96 To search for scenes in clips with the expand thumbnail screen The expand thumbnail screen is convenient when you want to find and cue up a specific scene in a long clip To display the expand thumbnail screen select a clip in the thumbnail screen and press the DISP SEL EXPAND button see page 22 or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Forward Expansion in the setup menu The selected clip is displayed as follows HD mode The clip is divided into 12 equally sized blocks and a thumbnail of the first frame in each block is displayed SD mode Only in the case of clips that have been split into partial files because the file size was larger than 2 GB a thumbnail of the first frame of each partial file is displayed This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired scene in a clip of long duration See Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen page 106 for more information about the expand thumbnail screen To search for essence marks in clips with the essence mark thumbnail screen UDF FAT HD When a clip contains one or more essence marks you can
227. o the other media when the recording mode is UDF Genlock is not possible If power is lost during recording If you set the camcorder s POWER switch to OFF the camcorder is powered off automatically after a few seconds during which the media is accessed to record the video and audio data stored in the camcorder s memory up to that point If power is lost because the battery was removed the DC power cord was disconnected or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor side then the video and audio data shot up to that point may be lost maximum 10 seconds Be careful to avoid this when exchanging the battery Shooting Stop Motion Animations Frame Rec Function The Frame Rec function is useful for shooting stop motion animations such as animations with puppets or clay figures Each time that you press the recording start button the camcorder shoots a specified number of frames and then stops Frame Rec settings and shooting The Frame Rec function cannot be used at the same time as the picture cache Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Motion or Clip Continuous Rec function When you select Frame Rec mode the picture cache Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Motion and Clip Continuous Rec functions are disabled When you select picture cache Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Motion or Clip Continuous Rec mode the Frame Rec function is disabled The data stored in memory is cleared when you change the system settings
228. oad select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you selected Lens Recall SxS gt Execute in step 2 the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section when you execute the load When the specified lens file has been loaded a completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out When using a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a formatted USB flash drive see page 75 to the external device connector Select Lens Recall USB gt Execute in step 2 Loading Lens Files Automatically When you are using a lens that support serial communication you can set up the camcorder by automatically loading the lens file that corresponds to the lens settings Lens Auto Recall function To use the Lens Auto Recall function set FILE gt Lens gt Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of the following On Load the lens file that corresponds to the model name Off Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function Serial Number Load the lens file that corresponds to the model name and serial number when the lens supports communication of the serial number If the lens does not support communication of the serial number both settings load the lens file that corresponds to the model name Saving and Loading User Files You can save the customized USER menu configuration and settings along with white balance data as user files Saving User Files To save a user file to an SxS me
229. of at least 99 99 Thus a very small proportion of pixels maybe stuck either always off black always on red green or blue or flashing In addition over a long period of use because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display such stuck pixels may appear spontaneously These problems are not a malfunction Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data Phenomena specific to CCD image sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD Charge Coupled Device image sensors They do not indicate malfunctions White flecks Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high precision technologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases When operating at a high environmental temperature When you have raised the master gain sensitivity In SLS mode white flecks are more prominent when you set the shutter speed number of frames to higher values The problem may be alleviated by executing the APR automatic pixel noise reduction function with MAINTENANCE gt APR in the setup menu see page 152 Pixel noise is reduced to some extent by automatic black balance adjustment see page 56 but the detection capabilities of that function are l
230. ogressive format recording 1080 29 97P 1080 23 98P 720 59 94P 720 29 97P 720 23 98P or 1080 25P 720 50P 720 25P thus offering the flexibility needed for worldwide HD recording It also supports recording and playback of SD signals both NTSC and PAL The camcorder has an optional capability to record and play back SD signals in IMX DVCAM format and can output HD signals down converted to SD A variety of functions for improved performance under various shooting conditions e Picture Cache function e Optical ND filters and electrical CC filters e Hyper gamma e Slow shutter function e Clip Continuous Rec function e Frame Recording function Time lapse function interval recording e Slow amp quick motion function e Freeze mix function e Live amp Play function e Digital extender function 1 e Focus magnification function e Assignable switches Features 13 MGIAJ8AO Ja deyD 14 e 3 5 inch high resolution color LCD monitor e Remote control 1 When the optional CBK HD02 SDI Composite Input and 50 pin Interface is installed Recording data to USB flash drives and reading data from USB flash drives UDF mode You can connect USB flash drives to the external device connector to record proxy data or read planning metadata You can also save setup menu settings to USB flash drives and load menu settings from USB flash drives into the camcorder Wireless LAN support You can connect this camcorder
231. om a USB flash drive in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute Lens Store USB Execute Cancel Stores a file to a USB flash drive in UDF mode only execute by selecting Execute File ID Assigns a name to the most recently loaded file Names can be up to 16 characters in length Source Displays the number of the selected file Lens No Offset Execute Cancel Clears a file execute by selecting Execute Lens Auto Recall Off On Serial Number When the installed lens supports serial communication specifies whether to automatically load that reference file Off Do not use this function On Load the reference for the model name and reflect the contents of the file Serial Number For lenses that support serial number communication load the lens file that corresponds to the serial number and model name and reflect the contents of that file For lenses that do not support serial number communication load the reference for the model name in the same way as when On is selected Serial Number Displays the serial number of the installed lens only for lenses that support serial communication Lens ID Displays the model name of the installed lens only for lenses that support serial communication Menu List sBunjes payreyaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 159 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 160 FILE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Lens L M
232. on or Clip Continuous Rec mode The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared when you change the system settings for example by selecting a different video format Picture data from before the change is not recorded even if you start recording immediately after the change The camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically It is not possible to set the picture cache time during recording 1 Inthe setup menu select OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Picture Cache Rec For menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 2 Turn the MENU knob to select On and then press the knob 3 Select P Cache Rec Time turn the MENU knob to select the desired picture cache time and then press the knob You can select from 0 2sec 2 4sec 4 6sec 6 8sec 8 10sec 10 12sec 12 14sec and 13 15sec Once made picture cache mode settings remain in effect until changed Instead of carrying out steps 1 and 2 you can also select picture cache mode by using an assignable switch to which the Picture Cache function has been assigned see page 161 Camcorder data handling while recording in picture cache mode Recording procedures in picture cache mode are basically the same as normal recording procedures However note the following differences with respect to how the camcorder handles video time and output data If you start recording while the media is being accessed the start point of the video that is a
233. ophone AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 switches To AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used Switch the input level by changing the setting of MAINTENANCE gt Audio gt Rear MIC CH1 CH2 Ref in the setup menu factory default setting is 60 dB For details see page 141 If the input level on the camcorder is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity loud sounds may be distorted and the signal to noise ratio may be affected In order for the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor When you detach a CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 in step 1 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone System To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system power the camcorder off and then fit one of the following UHF portable tuners DWR SOID Digital Wireless Receiver WRR 855S UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit WRR 860A 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner For details of these units refer to the operation manuals for them The optional WRR Mount Bracket service part number A 8278 057 B
234. or menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 2 Turn the MENU knob to select On and then press the knob The camcorder enters Slow amp Quick Motion mode and the S amp Q STBY indication in the viewfinder lights 3 Select Frame Rate turn the MENU knob to select the recording frame rate and then press the knob The setting range for the frame rate is as follows System Frame rate lines 1080 When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 25 In FAT mode or when OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to other than PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 30 720 When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 50 In FAT mode or when OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to other than PAL Area in UDF mode 1 to 60 When you finish making these settings the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen You can change the frame rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by turning the MENU knob The Slow amp Quick Motion mode setting and the frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is powered off To shoot in Slow amp Quick Motion mode Shoot as described in Basic Operations page 76 When recording starts the S amp Q STBY indication in the viewfinder changes to the S amp Q REC
235. or reverse direction Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 21 MBIAJ8AQO Je deuD 22 EJ F FWD fast forward button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the forward direction The playback speed changes in the order x4 x15 x24 with each press of the button The indicator lights during high speed playback in the forward direction PREV button This jumps to the first frame of the current clip If you press this together with the F REV button the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the recording media If you press this button twice in rapid succession the jump is to the first frame of the last preceding clip or the first frame of the current clip when no preceding clips exist STOP button Press this button to stop playback NEXT button This jumps to the first frame of the next clip If you press this together with the F FWD button the jump is to the first frame of the last recorded clip on the recording media DISP SEL display selection EXPAND expand function button With each press of this button the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows Display indication Meaning Video with The LCD monitor displays superimposed the same text information as information CHAR the viewfinder Video without The video only appears superimposed information MONI Status display Counter indications STATUS warnings audio levels and similar
236. ording see page 77 Normal recording starts Recording Proxy Data UDF Proxy data is made up of low resolution video data MPEG 4 and audio data A Low video 1 5 Mbps audio 64 Kbps per channel This lightweight proxy data can be used in the same way as the original data but it can be transferred more quickly for more efficient viewing and editing In UDF mode proxy data is generated and recorded automatically when you record video and audio with a USB flash drive connected to the external device connector By loading the proxy data from the USB flash drive into a computer you can quickly check the recorded content or perform rapid offline editing Do not power this unit off or do not remove the USB flash drive while the USB flash drive is being accessed Doing so may cause the loss of all data recorded on the USB flash drive Recording Proxy Data While Recording Clips You can record proxy data to a USB flash drive while recording clips to an SxS memory card 1 Set MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Memory Rec in the setup menu to Enable 2 Connect a USB flash drive formatted with the FAT32 file system to the external device connector see page 75 3 Start recording At the same time that the original data is recorded to an SxS memory card proxy data is saved to the automatically generated MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC lt Proav ID gt folder Proav ID is an ID specified in the DISCMETA XML file on the S
237. ording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows Rear1 WRR Level Channel 1 recording level Setting Knob Sidel LEVEL CH1 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Front Sidel LEVEL CH1 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation Rear2 WRR Level Channel 2 recording level Setting Knob Side2 LEVEL CH2 knob Front MIC LEVEL control Front Side2 LEVEL CH2 knob and MIC LEVEL control linked operation When you have operation of the LEVEL CH1 CH2 knobs and MIC LEVEL control linked together if the MIC LEVEL control is set to 0 the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded Check the position of the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL CH1 CH2 knobs Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch es to FRONT 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch es for the desired channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL control and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume Gorrespondence between recording level adjustments and audio level controls On MAINTENANCE gt Audio in the setup menu you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input The correspondences between the settings of the menu it
238. ot retained Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2 OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark Clip Flag OK Add clear an OK mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played Clip Flag NG Add clear an NG mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played Clip Flag Keep Add clear a KP mark to from the clip being recorded or Setting not retained played Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches sBunjes pellrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 161 Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN 2 Switch mg Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN 2 switch or you switch the recording format the setting of the switch at that point may not match the camcorder s internal state After assigning a function switch the ASSIGN 2 switch or power the camcorder off and on again Assignable switch setting Function Off No assignment Front Mic Switch between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected Marker Turn the display of all markers on or off Picture Cache Turn the picture cache function on or off Zebra Turn zebra display on or off Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off Digital Extender Turn the screen magnification function on or off when the optional CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed Rec Source Switch the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and ext
239. otion and Clip Continuous Rec functions are disabled When you select picture cache Frame Rec Slow amp Quick Motion or Clip Continuous Rec mode the Interval Rec function is disabled The data stored in picture cache memory is cleared when you change the system settings for example by selecting a different video format Picture data from before the change is not recorded even if you start recording immediately after the change The camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording Interval Rec is disabled when the following formats are selected In FAT mode SP 1440 59 94i or SP 1440 50i when the output setting is HD and OPERATION gt Input Advanced Operations 81 Bunooys p Je dBUD 82 Output gt i LINK I O in the setup menu is set to Enable In FAT mode SP 1440 23 98P pull down recording In UDF mode HD420 HQ 1280x720 23 98P pull down recording Other than HQ 1920 23 98P or HQ 1280 23 98P when the output setting is SD and OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK T O in the setup menu is set to Enable To make Interval Rec settings 1 Select OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Interval Rec in the setup menu For menu operations see Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 2 Turn the MENU knob to select On and then press the knob The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode the Interval indication on the viewfinder screen flashes
240. own out highlights The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value e 0 25 to 1 increasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further open e 0 25 to 1 decreasing by increments of 0 25 About 0 25 to 1 stop further close Also you can set the area where light detection occurs To change the reference value Set OPERATION gt Auto Iris gt Iris Override in the setup menu to On see page 126 Set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS An indicator of the current reference value is shown at the iris position indication see page 36 on the viewfinder screen To make the iris more open Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder Select one of 0 25 0 5 0 75 or 1 To stop down the iris Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder Select one of 0 25 0 5 0 75 or 1 The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on To set the automatic iris window Set OPERATION gt Auto Iris gt Iris Window Indication in the setup menu to On The current automatic iris window appears on the viewfinder screen If it is not
241. pe Normal Color Both Selects the peaking type Normal Normal peaking Color Color peaking Both Both Peaking Frequency gt Normal High Selects Normal or High as the peaking frequency Peaking Color P White Red Yellow Blue When the Peaking Type setting is Color selects the peaking color from among White Red Yellow and Blue VF Detail Level 99 to 0 to 99 Adjusts the detail level set on the camcorder of the viewfinder Color Peaking Level b Low Mid High When the Peaking Type setting is Both selects the color peaking level from among Low Mid and High Marker Makes settings related to marker display in the viewfinder screen Setting On Off Turns all markers on or off When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN 2 switch this setting is disabled Center Marker 1 2 3 4 Off When the center marker is displayed selects the type Select Off if you do not want to display the marker When three of Safety Zone User Box Guide Frame and 100 Marker are set to On this setting cannot be turned on Center H Position 40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the horizontal position of the center marker Center V Position 40 to 0 to 40 Specifies the vertical position of the center marker Safety Zone On Off Turns the safety zone display on or off When three of Center Marker User Box Guide Frame and 100 Marker are set to On th
242. pecial mode Slow amp Quick Motion Interval Rec Frame Rec For Slow amp Quick Motion clips the frame rates are displayed to the right as Recording frame rate Playback frame rate Timecode of the displayed image Timecode of the recording start point Timecode of the recording end point Duration Recorded audio channels 6666 Video format of recording Adding and Deleting OK NG or KP Marks UDF FAT HD You can add OK NG or KP marks to clips This makes it possible to display thumbnails of only the clips that you need by pressing the THUMBNAIL button To add an OK mark FAT HD 1 m the thumbnail screen select THUMBNAIL gt Add OK Mark The screen changes to the clip properties screen and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob An OK mark is added to the selected clip You can use an assignable switch to which Clip Flag OK is assigned to add OK marks To add an OK NG or KP mark UDF 1 In the thumbnail screen select THUMBNAIL gt Set Clip Flag 2 Select one of OK NG or KP in the setting area 3 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The mark selected in step 2 is added to the selected clip You can use assignable switches to which Clip Flag OK Clip Flag NG and Clip Flag Keep are assigned to add OK NG and KP marks To delete an OK mark FAT HD A Delete OK Mar
243. plied with WRR 862 Phillips type screwdriver 2 Attach the battery pack On how to attach the battery pack see To attach the battery pack on page 37 3 Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting WRR 862 4 Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector of the camcorder and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector D Set the switches as follows e Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to which the audio output cable is attached to MIC e Set the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR If the XLR connection automatic detection function is on the input signal for audio recording is selected automatically and therefore this setting is not required Preparing the Audio Input System AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 switches To DC OUT connector To AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector AUDIO IN selectors Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Switch settings Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded e With the XLR connection automatic detection function being off the factory default setting A signal must be selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN CHI or CH
244. ps to copy and then select THUMBNAIL gt Copy All gt All Clips The confirmation message Copy All Clip appears 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The copy starts During the copy the progress of the copy is displayed If you executed the copy in HD mode only HD mode clips are copied If you executed the copy in SD mode only SD mode clips are copied To cancel the copy operation Press the RESET RETURN button When the copy finishes A completion message appears and the THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again To copy all files in the General directory To copy all files only without copying clips select THUMBNAIL gt Copy All gt General Files in step 1 To copy all files together with all clips select THUMBNAIL gt Copy All gt All Clips amp General Files in step 1 Deleting Clips You can delete clips from SxS memory cards 1 In the thumbnail screen select the thumbnail of the clip to delete and then select THUMBNAIL gt Delete Clip The screen changes to the properties screen of that clip and a confirmation message appears beneath the index picture 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The clip is deleted In the thumbnail screen the clips that followed the deleted clip move up one position To batch delete groups of clips You can batch delete groups of clips from an SxS memory card When both HD mode and SD mode clips exist on the SxS memory card only clips in the cur
245. r Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining pee DV sone O Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take a module o No space is left on the Recording stops Replace it with another z SxS memory card Recording clip e copying and clip 2 division cannot be 8 performed WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining w DD w w Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take amp hy S z 2 2 5 a The battery power will Recording continues Charge the battery pack at the earliest be exhausted soon opportunity WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining pea 2 ent w Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module Battery End The battery pack is exhausted Recording cannot be performed Recording stops Connect a power source via the DC IN connector or stop operation to charge the battery pack WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining w oy w Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module The internal temperature has risen Temperature High above a safe operation limit Recording continues Suspend operation turn off the power and wait until the temperature falls Operation Warnings 183 soueuajuley 6 Ja deyuD 184 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Ba
246. r This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder E CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder HIGH The tally indicator brightness is set to high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is set to low ZEBRA zebra pattern switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows ON Display a zebra pattern OFF Do not display a zebra pattern DISPLAY switch Turns the display of text information on and off ON Display text information OFF Do not display text information MIRROR switch The image display on the monitor screen becomes reversed horizontally or vertically when the viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated Use this switch to control the image display in such situation L R Reverse the image horizontally OFF Do not reverse the image B T Reverse the image vertically Viewfinder cable Microphone holder Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen Indicators HDVF 20A The following indicators are arranged above and below the screen of the HDVF 20A to show the current state and adjustments of the camcorder TALLY REC i 1 I BAT
247. r the associated function or information is available only in that mode HD HD mode When OPERATION gt Format gt HD SD in the setup menu is set to HD UDF UDF mode When OPERATION gt Format gt File System in the setup menu is set to UDF FAT FAT mode When OPERATION gt Format gt File System in the setup menu is set to FAT FAT HD FAT HD mode When OPERATION gt Format gt File System in the setup menu is set to FAT and OPERATION gt Format gt HD SD in the setup menu is set to HD FAT SD FAT SD mode When OPERATION gt Format gt File System in the setup menu is set to FAT and OPERATION gt Format gt HD SD in the setup menu is set to SD Features 3 IT Interline Transfer 2 3 inch progressive image sensors with 207 million pixels for full HD resolution 1920 x 1080 e PowerHAD FX CCDs featuring a signal processing ASIC with 14 bit A D converters These new image sensor technologies enable 2 inch full HD PowerHAD FX CCDs the capture of very high quality images with F11 59 941 and F12 50i sensitivity and an SN ratio of 59 dB 1 With noise suppression on off value is 54 dB Noise suppression uses proprietary Sony signal processing technology to suppress noise in highfrequency regions SxS memory cards as recording media Using SxS memory cards the camcorder offers nonlinear capabilities such as instant random ac
248. r audio cable plugs After adjusting the position tighten the screws to secure the cover EJ AUDIO OUT connector XLR type 5 pin male Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4 The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch EB REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect a remote control unit which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely Before connecting disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch i LINK HDV DV connector 6 pin TEEE1394 compliant S400 FAT When the recording mode is FAT to input and output HDV DV streams connect to an HDV DV device M8IAJ8AO Je deuD LCD Monitor TCG IDDDD PPD gt gt gt gt DDDDDDD 01 23 45 67 Media Near Full 216MIN 100 2 Resolution Indicates the resolution of HD output video Indication Resolution horizontal x vertical 1080 1080 lines 1920 x 1080 720 720 lines 1280 x 720 Recording format Indicates the current recording format or the recording format of clip being currently played e UDF mode HD422 50 HD420 HQ IMX50 DVCAM e FAT mode HQ1920 HQ1440 HQ1280 SP1440 DVCAM Recording mode UDF UDF mode FAT FAT mode Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 27 MAIAIOAC J deUuD 28 E File format MXF When the recording mode is UDF MP4 When the recordi
249. r obtenir les informations importantes et l ensemble des termes et conditions de la garantie limit e de Sony applicable ce produit Um die Gefahr von Br nden oder elektrischen Schl gen zu verringern darf dieses Ger t nicht Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Geh use nicht ge ffnet werden Uberlassen Sie Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem Fachpersonal WARNUNG Zu hoher Schalldruck von Ohrh rern und Kopfh rern kann Geh rsch den verursachen Um dieses Produkt sicher zu verwenden vermeiden Sie l ngeres H ren bei sehr hohen Schalldruckpegeln Fiir Kunden in Europa Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE Kennzeichnung und erf llt die EMV Richtlinie der EG Kommission Angewandte Normen e EN55103 1 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St raussendung e EN55103 2 Elektromagnetische Vertr glichkeit St rfestigkeit F r die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen E1 Wohnbereich E2 kommerzieller und in beschr nktem Ma e industrieller Bereich E3 Stadtbereich im Freien und E4 kontrollierter EMV Bereich z B Fernsehstudio Der Hersteller dieses Produkts ist Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japan Der autorisierte Repr sentant f r EMV und Produktsicherheit ist Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Deutschland Bei jeglichen Angelegenheiten in Bezug auf Kun
250. ration Select the method used to reset the counter value displayed on the viewfinder screen Counter Continue to increment until the RESET button is pressed Duration Reset each time that recording is started Essence Mark Ret Shot Mark 1 Makes settings related to shot marks and clip On Off Specify whether to input Shot Mark1 marks using the RET button on the lens index picture thumbnails Ret Shot Mark 2 On Off Specify whether to input Shot Mark2 marks using the RET button on the lens Index Pic Pos Osec to 10sec in 1 sec steps Specifies which frame to use as the clip thumbnail image Find Mode Clip Rec Start Specify the frame to be cued up when the PREV or NEXT button is pressed Rec Start The next frame or the previous frame where a Rec Start essence mark is set Clip Pressing the NEXT button moves to the start frame of the next clip Pressing the PREV button moves to the start frame of the current clip Pressing the PREV button at the start frame of the current clip moves to the start frame of the previous clip Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 145 sbunies pelrejeq pue nuejy 9 Ja deyo 146 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Camera Config Rec Tally Blink Makes settings related to various camcorder operations On Off Turns warning flashes by the TALLY indicator on or off The warnings alert you an
251. remove the battery pack while the camcorder is recording while the ACCESS lamp on the right side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange Doing so risks the loss of several seconds of data before the recording was interrupted because internal processing will not end normally The playback control buttons EJECT F REV F FWD NEXT PREV PLAY PAUSE STOP do not function during recording 11 To stop recording perform one of the operations listed in step 10 The TALLY indicators the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen go out and camcorder enters recording standby STBY mode A clip is created from the video and audio data and the metadata recorded between steps 10 and 11 When the recording mode is UDF if you stop recording within two seconds of starting recording continues and this results in a two second clip To check the recording recording review With the camcorder in recording standby STBY mode turn on the assignable switch to which the Rec Review function or the Freeze Mix function has been assigned see page 161 The camcorder plays the entire last clip or the last few seconds of that clip three seconds or 10 seconds and then returns to standby mode You can use MAINTENANCE gt Camera Config gt Rec Review in the setup menu see page 146 to change the playback time When the Rec Review function
252. rently selected mode are deleted 1 In the thumbnail screen select the thumbnails of the clips to delete and then select THUMBNAIL gt Delete All Clips Thumbnail Operations suonesedo dio G 13 dey9 105 suoneiado dijo G saydeyp 106 The confirmation message Delete All Clips appears 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The deletion starts During the deletion the progress of the deletion is displayed If you executed the deletion in HD mode only HD mode clips are deleted If you executed the deletion in SD mode only SD mode clips are deleted To cancel the deletion Press the RESET RETURN button When the deletion finishes A completion message appears and the THUMBNAIL menu screen appears again Displaying the Expand Thumbnail Screen The expand thumbnail screen allows you to search inside clips by using thumbnails see page 97 to change index pictures see page 108 and to add and delete shot marks see page 108 To display the screen In the thumbnail screen select a thumbnail and press the DISP SEL EXPAND button see page 22 or select THUMBNAIL gt Thumbnail View gt Forward Expansion An expand thumbnail screen for the selected clip appears Expand thumbnail screen in UDF FAT HD mode UDF FAT HD In UDF mode or FAT HD mode the selected clip is divided into 12 equally sized blocks and a thumbnail of the first frame in each block is displayed Th
253. ress the sound Layout of the table of warning messages WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining B c D E Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module e The operation of the WARNING indicator the tally REC indication and the battery indicator is represented by graphic symbols as follows xt Continuous 38 1 flash s 304 4 flashes s The warning sounds are represented by graphic symbols as follows s Continuous beep 1 beep s Error Indication WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining 300 seg Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module Error The camcorder Recording stops Turn off the power and confirm whether an error is abnormal occurs on the connected devices the cables and the media or not If power cannot be turned off by setting the POWER switch to OFF remove the battery pack or the AC power source If the problem continues after the camcorder is restarted contact your Sony service representative Operation Warnings Warning Indication module WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining E s w Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take Free space on the SxS memory card has Media Near Full become insufficient Recording continues Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity module WARNING indicato
254. rmat menu settings Video format recording Frame size HD SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency format system frequency Line HD 1080 HD422 59 94i HD422 1920 59 94i 1920x1080 50 50i HD422 1920 50i 29 97P HD422 1920 29 97P 25P HD422 1920 25P 23 98P HD422 1920 23 98P HD420 59 94i HQ 1920 59 94i 1920x1080 HQ1920 50i HQ 1920 50i 29 97P HQ 1920 29 97P 25P HQ 1920 25P 23 98P HQ 1920 23 98P HD420 59 94i HQ 1440 59 94i 1440x1080 HQ1440 50i HQ 1440 50i 29 97P HQ 1440 29 97P 25P HQ 1440 25P 23 98P HQ 1440 23 98P 720 HD422 59 94P HD422 1280 59 94P 1280x720 50 50P HD422 1280 50P 29 97P HD422 1280 29 97P 25P HD422 1280 25P 23 98P HD422 1280 23 98P HD420 59 94P HQ 1280 59 94P HQ 50P HQ 1280 50P 23 98P HQ 1280 23 98P Setting the Video Format 53 OPERATION gt Format menu settings Video format recording Frame size HD SD HD System Rec Format System Frequency a format system frequency Line SD IMX50 9 59 94i IMX50 59 94i 720x486 50i IMX50 50i 720x576 29 97P 9 IMX50 29 97P 720x486 25P 9 IMX50 25P 720x576 DVCAM 59 94i DVCAM 59 94i 720x480 50i DVCAM 50i 720x576 29 97P D DVCAM 29 97P 720x480 25P 9 DVCAM 25P 720x576 a 59 94i 29 97P 59 94P 23 98P When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to NTSC Area or NTSC J Area 50i 25P 50P When OPERATION gt Format gt Country in the setup menu is set to PAL Area b 59 94i after 2 3 pulldown is recorded c When the option
255. rough internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals LCD monitor Displays remaining battery capacity remaining media capacity audio levels time data and so on see page 27 Also allows you to check camera and playback pictures You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD monitor M8IAJ8AO Je deuD A NF WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs see page 182 ACCESS lamp Lights up in blue when data is written to or read from the recording media Protection cover of the audio control section Open to access the audio control section see page 23 f Protection cover of the thumbnail screen operations section Open to access the thumbnail screen operations section see page 23 F REV fast reverse button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction The playback speed changes in the order x4 x15 x24 with each press of the button The indicator lights during high speed playback in the reverse direction EJ PLAY PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view play back video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor The indicator lights during playback Press this button again during playback to pause outputting a still image At this time the indicator flashes at a rate of once per second Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during playback or pause starts high speed playback in the forward
256. roup of clips recorded with the same planning metadata You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list After turning the MENU knob to select an item you can press the SET button to display the selected item only To clear the planning metadata loaded Under OPERATION gt Plan Metadata gt Clear in the setup menu select Execute 2 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Deletion of the file starts The message Clear Planning Metadata File OK appears when the deletion finishes Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file The ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder The UTF 8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name You can select which type of clip name is displayed with OPERAION gt Planning Metadata gt Clip Name Disp in the setup menu When a clip name is set with planning metadata the name is displayed under the depth of field indication on the viewfinder screen When you define both of ASCII format name and UTF 8 format name with planning metadata the UTF 8 format string is used as the clip name string If you define either of ASCII format name and UTF 8 format name with planning metadata the defined format name is displayed though it is not selected by menu setting Clip name string example Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the lt Title gt
257. s page 182 TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function EARPHONE jack stereo minijack You can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built in speaker You can select monaural or stereo on MAINTENANCE gt Audio in the setup menu AUDIO IN selectors Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO IN CH1 CH2 connectors LINE When connecting a stereo amplifier or other external audio signal source MIC When connecting a microphone that does not require 48 V power supply 48V When connecting a microphone that requires 48 V power supply HD SD SDI OUT connector BNC type Outputs an HDSDI or SDSDI signal with embedded audio The output from this connector can be turned on or off by OPERATION gt Input Output gt SDI Output in the setup menu M AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 and channel 2 input connectors XLR type 3 pin female These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone Bottom cover This is provided for protecting the cables connected to the connectors on the rear panel By loosening the screws which retain the cover to the bottom of the camcorder you can adjust the position of the cover depending on the size and shape of the microphone o
258. s or load a memory card that has been formatted in UDF mode into the camcorder set to FAT mode a message to confirm if formatting is to be executed appears in the viewfinder see page 73 In this case format the memory card in the following way SxS memory cards are formatted in FAT mode as factory default SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM EX device or on this camcorder Cards in other formats cannot be used To format initialize a memory card If the message for formatting is displayed turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Execution of the format starts During execution of the format a progress indication appears and the ACCESS lamp lights in orange When formatting is completed the completion message is displayed for three seconds Recording and playback during format execution Even during execution of a format recording and playback are possible using an SxS memory card loaded into the other card slot If the format operation fails A format operation may fail because the SxS memory card is write protected or because it is not the type of card specified for use with this camcorder In this case an error message appears Following the instructions in the error message and exchange the card for an SxS memory card that can be used with this camcorder To format by menu operation When no formatting message is displayed you can execute formatting by menu opera
259. s a recording start button Selecting picture cache mode and setting the picture cache time Before recording in picture cache mode you must select picture cache mode and set the picture cache time the number of seconds of video and audio data stored to memory in the OPERATION menu The picture cache time determines how far in advance you can start recording counting back in seconds from the operation that starts recording Note that it may not be possible to start this far in advance in the special cases explained in the following notes Storage of picture data to memory begins when you select picture cache mode Therefore if you start recording immediately after selecting picture cache mode the picture data from before the selection is not recorded No data is recorded to picture cache memory during playback or recording review and display of Advanced Operations thumbnails It is not possible to record picture data from the time you were conducting playback or a recording review To select picture cache mode and set the picture cache time e Picture cache recording is not possible in Frame Rec Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Motion and Clip Continuous Rec mode The camcorder exits Frame Rec Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Motion or Clip Continuous Rec mode whenever you select picture cache mode The camcorder exits picture cache mode automatically whenever you select Frame Rec Interval Rec Slow amp Quick Moti
260. s are not marked with Rec Start marks In UDF mode only Shot Mark1 Display only frames marked with Shot Mark marks Shot Mark2 Display only frames marked with Shot Mark2 marks You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9 If you have recorded clips by using planning metadata that defined names for Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 the defined names are displayed instead of the above item names in the list Example shot mark thumbnail screen with Shot Mark1 selected 01 10 30 00 01 10 40 00 01 10 50 00 The properties of the clip appear at the bottom of the screen Except for the following item the information displayed here is the same as the information displayed in the expand thumbnail screen Thumbnail Operations suolesedo dio G J9 dEUD 107 suoiesado dio G J8 dBUJ 108 Timecode This is the timecode of the selected frame in the shot mark thumbnail screen Adding and Deleting Shot Marks UDF FAT HD In the essence mark thumbnail screen see page 107 or the expand thumbnail screen see page 106 you can add thumbnails to any frame of clips recorded in HD mode and delete recorded shot marks To add shot marks Select the frame where you want to add a shot mark and then select THUMBNAIL gt Set Shot Mark gt Add Shot Mark1 or Add Shot Mark2 The properties screen of the selected frame appears and a confirmation message appe
261. s camcorder EJ playback can be done Replace it with another card as the memory card is S defective WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module A card of a different file system was inserted Recording stops It cannot be used with this camcorder Replace it with another card or format it on this camcorder Operation Warnings 185 soueuajuley 6 Ja deuD 186 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder module Action to take The external signal input via the i LINK connection cannot be recorded as the Video Format setting is different from the signal format of the external input signal Video Format Mismatch Recording stops Change settings of OPERATION gt Format in the setup menu to match it to that of the external signal WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining ak Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take 23 module EN 5 E The external signal Recording stops Check the input signal af input via the i LINK gt SJ connection cannot be O recorded as the stream is copy protected WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining a a 5 a Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take PES z 2 module E E The e
262. s in the engaged position you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor Connecting a Video Light Connecting a Video Light With this camcorder you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop recording on this camcorder The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power through the DC IN connector or battery pack The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack is under 12 V To attach the video light Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector The accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder is of the 1 4 inch tapped hole type If you want to replace this with a slide type shoe use the supplied cold shoe kit On how to fit the cold shoe kit refer to Using a External Hard Disk in the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manua
263. screen Filter White Memory On Off Specifies whether to allocate a white balance memory area for each FILTER knob position On Allocation a white balance memory area for each FILTER knob position Off Use A B memory regardless of the filter position Menu List sBunjes payreyaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 127 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 se deyo 128 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Offset White Makes settings related to white balance offset values Offset White lt A gt On Off Specifies whether to add On or not to add Off an offset value to the white balance value in memory A Warm Cool lt A gt Approximate color temperature When the setting of Offset White lt A gt is On specifies as a color temperature the offset to add to the white balance value in memory A Note that the error range becomes larger for higher offset color temperatures Adjust while viewing the actual video Warm Cool Balance lt A gt 09 to 0 to 99 Specifies a more precise color temperature for use when satisfactory video cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool lt A gt setting Offset White lt B gt On Off When this is set to On the offset adjusted set with this item is added to the white balance of channel B Warm Cool lt B gt Approximate color temperature When the setting of Offset White lt B gt is On specifies as a color te
264. se the recorded model name On or not Off Shot Serial On Off Selects whether to superimpose the Number serial number On or not Off Shot ID Select ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 Off Selects whether or not to superimpose the shot ID set with the Shot ID item and which shot ID is superimposed Menu List OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description White Setting White Switch lt B gt Makes settings related to auto white balance adjustments Memory ATW Specifies the operating mode selected by the B position of the WHITE BAL switch Memory Auto white balance ATW Auto tracing white balance Shockless White Off 1 2 3 Specifies the reaction speed when the WHITE BAL switch setting is changed Off is an instant reaction and 1 is faster than 2 or 3 ATW Speed 1 2 3 4 5 Specifies the reaction speed when the White Switch lt B gt setting is ATW 1 is the fastest reaction ATW Mode Natural Pure Natural Depending on the brightness of scenes automatically adjusts the white balance to natural ambience Pure Not leaving the blue color or red color automatically adjusts the white balance closer to original colors AWB Fixed Area On Off Specifies whether auto white balance is executed at the center of the screen On Execute in an area corresponding to 25 of the height and width of the screen Off Execute in an area corresponding to 70 of the height and width of the
265. standard value Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 J8 dEUD 125 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 JajdeyUD 126 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Auto Iris Iris Override On Off Turns iris override a setting that opens Makes settings or closes the iris more than normal on related to auto iris or off Iris Speed 99 to 0 to 99 Specifies the iris control speed speed of reaction to changes in the video Larger values specify quicker reaction times Clip High light On Off Turns on or off the function that disregards highlights and forces a flatter reaction to high luminance Iris Window 1 2 3 4 5 6 Var Selects the auto iris detection window type Var Variable Iris Window On Off Turns the indication of the auto iris Indication detection window frame on or off Shot ID ID 1 Creates ID 1 strings up to 16 Creates the shot IDs characters superimposed superimposed on ID 2 Creates ID 2 strings up to 16 the color bars characters superimposed ID 3 Creates ID 3 strings up to 16 characters superimposed ID 4 Creates ID 4 strings up to 16 characters superimposed Shot Display Shot Date On Off Selects whether to superimpose the shot Selects which shot date On or not Off data is Shot Time On Off Selects whether to superimpose the shot superimposed on time On or not Off the color bars and Shot Model Name On Off Selects whether to superimpo
266. sted Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off Black balance adjustment The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases When the camcorder is used for the first time When the camcorder has not been used for a long time When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly When the GAIN selector L M H Turbo values have been changed by using OPERATION gt Gain Switch in the setup menu It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off White balance adjustment Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change Adjusting the Black Balance In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order black set and black balance Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in the following case During recording e In a special recording modes Picture Cache Rec Interval Rec Frame Rec Slow amp Quick e When the shutter mode is SLS Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance 2 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLACK and release the switch The message Executing
267. sts the level of audio recorded on channel 4 Side4 The LEVEL knob on side panel Front The MIC LEVEL control on the front panel Front Side4 Adjust with both the LEVEL knob and the MIC LEVEL control Menu List s6unies poleje dd pue nuaw 9 JajdeyD 143 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 144 MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description WRR Setting Makes settings related to the wireless tuner WRR Valid CH Sel AICH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver All or channel 1 only CH1 WRR CH Select TX1 TX2 Specifies the target channel for other sub items TX1 Channel 1 TX2 Channel 2 WRR Delay Comp On Off Enables On or disables Off delay compensation for wireless audio input When On is selected the audio in all E E output is delayed by about 8 ms TX Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT TX Audio Peak Peak Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT are over peak TX Input Level Mic Line Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT is set to microphone Mic or line Line TX ATT Level Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are be
268. t 5 that is not supported Operation Warnings WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder module Action to take The fan does not rotate Fan Stopped D when started WARNING indicator Warning sound Avoid use under high temperature conditions Power the camcorder off and contact a Sony service representative Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder module Action to take Restoration is required because the media was removed while the camcorder was in recording standby mode of Clip Continuous Rec see page 86 WARNING indicator Media was Ejected Just Now It Needs to be Restored Recording continues Warning sound Insert again the media which was removed and restore it see page 74 Tally REC Battery remaining Problem Operation in the recorder module Action to take Power to the external device connector was removed because overcurrent was detected on the connector Other operations are not affected USB Host Over Current Remove USB Device 1 B for the card in slot B Recording continues 2 B for a HDD connected to slot B Power the camcorder off and remove the Wi Fi adapter or USB flash drive that is connected to the external device connector Operation Warnings eoueueluley 6 Je deuD
269. t OFF COLOR TEMP color temperature button Press to light the button and change the color temperature for shooting factory default setting You can use this as an assignable switch see page 161 ALARM alarm tone volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard However if MAINTENANCE gt Audio gt Min Alarm Volume in the setup menu is set to Set the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position Maximum Minimu El MONITOR monitor volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard MONITOR audio monitor selection switches By means of combinations of the two switches you can select audio that you want to hear through the built in speaker or earphones Position of down side switch CH 1 2 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 1 audio MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 2 audio Position of down side switch CH 3 4 Position of up side Audio output switch CH 1 CH 3 Channel 3 audio MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 4 audio a By connecting
270. t be available Clip Playback Video format of recording Special recording information This displays the mode of clips that have been recorded in a special mode Slow amp Quick Motion Interval Rec Frame Rec For Slow amp Quick Motion clips the frame rates are displayed to the right as Recording frame rate Playback frame rate fps OK NG KP mark When the recording mode is UDF an OK NG or KP mark appears if the clip has been marked with an OK NG or KP mark see page 103 When the recording mode is FAT an OK mark appears only if the clip has been marked with an OK mark see page 103 File format Indicates the file format of the selected clip MXF or MP4 This item is not indicated when the recording mode is UDF HD mode Clip duration Timecode This is the timecode of the index picture FAT SD mode thumbnail screen FAT SD The icon of the currently selected SxS memory card is highlighted Cursor yellow If the card is write protected a lock appears on the left Clip number Number of components o Take mark Indicates that the file size is larger than 2 GB and that the clip has been split before being saved You can check the segment files on the expand thumbnail screen see page 106 Index picture When a clip is recorded its first frame is set automatically as the index picture Date and start time of recording
271. t to Off Frame Rec On Off Turns the Frame Rec function on or off When this is set to On the Slow amp Quick Picture Cache Rec and Interval Rec sub items are set to Off Number of Frames The available settings vary depending on the settings in Format gt HD System Line and Format gt System Frequency When Interval Rec or Frame Rec is set to On specifies the number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec or Frame Rec take 2frame 6frame 12frame When the HD System Line setting is 720 and the System Frequency setting is 59 94P or 50P 1frame 3frame 6frame Oframe When the HD System Line setting is other than 720 or the System Frequency setting is other than 59 94P or 50P Menu List sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 119 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 se deyo 120 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Rec Function Interval Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 When the Interval Rec setting is On Makes settings 20 30 40 50 sec sets the interval for Interval Rec related to special recording modes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 2 3 4 6 12 24 hour shooting Pre Lighting Off 2sec Ssec 10sec If you want the video light to be turned on before Interval Rec shooting select a number of seconds before the start of shooting If you do not want it to be turned on select Off Live Logging Live View In UDF mode Selects the Live Logging
272. t values 4 x 2 However the contents of the memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the following cases e When the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting OPERATION gt White Setting gt Filter White Memory in the setup menu to Off e When the electrical CC filter switching function has been assigned to an assignable switch or when a remote control unit has been connected In these cases the contents of white balance memory are linked to electrical CC filter positions A to D Also when OPERATION gt White Setting gt White Switch lt B gt in the setup menu is set to ATW Auto Tracing White Balance and the WHITE BAL switch is set to B the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter Modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below Standard mode Select this mode for shooting fast moving subjects with little blurring You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter modes Speed mode in which the speed is set in seconds and Angle mode in which the speed is set in degrees System lines 1080 System Shutter speed unit Hz frequency S amp Q Off S amp Q On 59 941 60 00 to 3800 50i 50 00 to 3500 29 97P 29 99 to 4100 32 01 to 41
273. tallation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules If you have any questions about this product you may call Sony Customer Information Service Center 1 800 222 7669 or http www sony com Declaration of Conformity Trade Name SONY Model PMW 500 Responsible party Sony Electronics Inc Address 16530 Via Esprillo San Diego CA 92127 U
274. tch Turns the main power supply on and off Using the CD ROM manual Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls M8IAJ8AO Je deuD 15 MGIAJ8AO Ja deyD 16 DC IN DC power input connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder from an AC power supply connect an optional DC power cord to this terminal and then connect the cord to the DC output terminal of the BC L70 BC L160 or another battery charger El DC OUT 12V DC power output connector 4 pin female Supplies power for an optional WRR 860C 861 862 UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner maximum 0 5 A Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF synthesized diversity tuner Battery attachment shoe Attach a BP L80S Battery Pack Alternatively you can attach an AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply For details see Preparing a Power Supply page 37 For details see Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner for a UHF Wireless Microphone System page 47 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the BP L80S Battery Pack Adaptor connector Enables connection of a CA FB70 HD Camera Adaptor or an HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adaptor To connect an adaptor remove the cover from the connector and install the optional CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls Accessory Attachments Sho
275. ter This indicates normal status With a Macintosh computer An icon is displayed on the menu bar USB Connection with a Computer Preparations When you connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable not supplied the memory card in the slot is acknowledged as an extended drive by the computer When two memory cards are mounted in this camcorder they are acknowledged as two independent extended drives by the computer USB cable not supplied W When connecting the USB cable to the computer be careful to check the form and direction of the USB connector The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the computer To start USB connection When a computer is connected to the PC connector of the camcorder and at the same time an optional PHU 220R Professional Harddisk Unit powered from a battery is connected to the computer battery exhaustion on the PHU 220R indicated by a Battery End warning disables the following To guard the PHU 220R against access from the computer To disconnect the PHU 220R s cable from the memory card slot or plug again the cable into the slot To turn on the tally indicator on the viewfinder screen to warn the operator Operating Clips with a Computer sedlneq Eu18 X GUND8UU09 g lajdeUQD 175 seolneq Jeuse xy Buyoeuuoy 8 deyg 176 When you connect a computer to the PC connector with a USB cable not supplied the message Connect USB
276. the Advanced Operations Buqooys b JejdeU 9 85 Bunooys p Je dBUD 86 same clip for as long as the function remains enabled This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit It is still easy to find recording start points because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording Clip Continuous Rec settings and shooting The Clip Continuous Rec function cannot be used at the same time as the Picture Cache Interval Rec Frame Rec or Slow amp Quick Motion function When you select Clip Continuous Rec mode the Picture Cache Interval Rec Frame Rec and Slow amp Quick Motion functions are disabled When you select picture cache Frame Rec Interval Rec or Slow amp Quick Motion mode the Clip Continuous Rec function is disabled The Clip Continuous Rec function is disabled when the recording mode is FAT To make Clip Continuous Rec settings Select OPERATION gt Rec Function gt Clip Continuous Rec in the setup menu See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for more information about menu operations 2 Turn the MENU knob to select On and then press the knob CONT appears in the viewfinder and the function is enabled You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on off function to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 switches ASSIGNABLE 4 5 switches
277. the camcorder is powered off automatically after a few seconds during which the media is accessed to record the video and audio data stored in the camcorder s memory up to that point e If power is lost because the battery was removed the DC cable was disconnected or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor side then the video and audio data stored in memory is lost The data stored in memory is not recorded Be careful to avoid this when exchanging the battery Recording Time lapse Video Interval Rec Function The camcorder s Interval Rec function allows you to capture time lapse video to the camcorder s internal memory This function is an effective way to shoot slow moving subjects When you start recording the camcorder automatically records a specified number of frames at a specified interval time Interval time ss Le Number of frames in one take Buqooys b se deyo A pre lighting function is available when Interval Rec is enabled This function automatically turns on a video light before recording starts which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions Interval Rec settings and shooting The Interval Rec function cannot be used at the same time as the picture cache Frame Rec Slow amp Quick Motion or Clip Continuous Rec function When you select Interval Rec mode the picture cache Frame Rec Slow amp Quick M
278. the fog proof filter the packing ring and the eyecup so that the reassembled eyepiece is waterproof When cleaning the fog proof filter wipe it very gently with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti fogging coating Note about the Battery Terminal The battery terminal of this unit the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors is a consumable part Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime Contact a Sony representative for more information about inspections Maintenance 8DUELUAIUIEIN_ 6 lejdeUD 181 8DUELUAIUIEIN_ 6 Ja deuD 182 Operation Warnings If a problem occurs when the camcorder is powered or is being operated a warning is issued by various visible and audible indicators These visible and audible indicators are e Error warning message A in the Layout of the table of warning messages below WARNING indicator B warning sound from the speaker and earphones C tally REC indication D and battery remaining indicator E A warning message and the REC indication appear on the viewfinder screen The volume of the warning sound can be adjusted with the ALARM knob Set the ALARM knob to the minimum position to supp
279. the following directories on an SXS memory card or a USB flash drive Recording Media Directory to which mode files are written FAT SxS memory BPAV General Sony card Planning SDHC PRIVATE SONY BPAV General Sony Planning UDF SxS memory General Sony Planning card USB flash drive e When a Wi Fi connection is made between the camcorder and a computer operate the Web menu built in the camcorder from the computer to transfer a file For details on how to use the Web menu to load a planning metadata file refer to the Supplement supplied in the CD ROM labeled Manuals for Solid State Memory Camcorder To load a planning metadata file by menu operation Do the following procedures with OPERAION gt Planning Metadata in the setup menu To load a file in an SxS memory card 1 Insert an SxS memory card into the memory card slot A or B and set Load Slot A or Load Slot B to Execute A file list appears The file list displays up to 64 files Even if the total number of planning metadata files is 64 or less all of the planning metadata files may not appear if the directory where they are located on the SxS memory card General Sony Planning contains 512 or more files Planning Metadata Operations Buqooys b JejdeU 9 89 Bunooys p Je dBUD 90 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load and press the knob To load a file in a USB flash drive in UDF mode Connect a USB flash driv
280. the knob Shot Serial Number To superimpose the serial number turn the MENU knob to set Shot Serial Number to On and press the knob Shot ID Select To superimpose a shot ID created arbitrarily turn the MENU knob to set Shot ID Select to one of ID 1 to ID 4 and press the knob To create a shot ID see the next sexton Creating a Shot ID Creating a Shot ID Up to four shot IDs of up to 16 characters can be created To create a shot ID 1 With OPEARTION gt Shot ID in the setup menu turn the MENU knob to select a shot ID to create ID 1 to ID 4 and press the knob OPERATION N ites gt Cul Zebra gt Op Display On Off gt Pal LED gt gt gt gt po ID 1_ _ 234567890123456 SET ID 2 Th Auto Iris My ShotID gt a Shot Display The shot ID setting screen appears 2 Follow the procedure in To enter text page 112 to create a shot ID Setting Shot Data suas pue sjuswjsnipy g ls deUD 67 sBunjes pue sluewisnipy Je deyo 68 Checking Camcorder Settings and Status Information Status Screens The status screens allow you to check camcorder settings and various types of status information There are five status screens listed below Status screen Information displayed CAMERA status Settings and status information related to shooting AUDIO status Settings and status information related to audio input and output VIDEO status Settin
281. the optional CBK HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is connected When a camera extension unit is not connected function as follows During recording or playback Write a shot mark In the other states Conduct a recording review if playback is allowed Return Video Display return video signals when the optional CBK HD02 is installed and a camera extension unit is connected Return Video2 For future system extension Currently not works Return Video3 For future system extension Currently not works Return Video4 For future system extension Currently not works Shot Mark1 Write Shot Mark1 Shot Mark2 Write Shot Mark2 OK Mark Add or delete an OK mark Clip Flag OK Add Clear an OK mark to from the clip being recorded Setting not retained or played Clip Flag NG Add Clear an NG mark to from the clip being recorded Setting not retained or played Clip Flag Keep Add Clear a KP mark to from the clip being recorded or played Setting not retained Color Temp SW 3200K Adjust the white balance with a 3200K preset value Setting retained Color Temp SW 4300K Adjust the white balance with a 4300K preset value Setting retained Color Temp SW 5600K Adjust the white balance with a 5600K preset value Setting retained Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches sBunjes pollrejed pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 163 sB
282. ting the camcorder with an aberration correction lens may require more time than normally because of data loading at start up Contact a Sony service representative for information about aberration correction lenses Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle adjust the flange focal length the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane Make this adjustment just one time after mounting or changing the lens When carrying out the adjustment use a flange focal length adjustment chart as the subject If you use a subject with insufficient contrast or move the camcorder or subject during adjustment this will cause an adjustment error Place the subject the flange focal length adjustment chart so that it appears at the center of the screen at the telephoto end Arrange so that no nearby object no object closer to the camera than the chart enters the screen at the wide angle end Mounting and Adjusting the Lens Carrying out the adjustment 1 Set the iris to manual 2 Open the iris position the supplied flange focal length adjustment chart approximately 3 meters 10 ft away from the camcorder and arrange the lighting to obtain a satisfactory video output 3 Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or F B ring flange focal length adjustment ring 4 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto
283. tion 1 Select OPERATION gt Format Media in the setup menu see page 115 2 Select Media A slot A or Media B slot B 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob The confirmation message for formatting is displayed on the viewfinder screen 4 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and press the knob Execution of the format starts During execution of the format a progress indication appears and the ACCESS lamp lights in orange When formatting is completed the completion message is displayed for three seconds All data is erased when you format a memory card including setup files and all of the recorded video data e Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder The formats of cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as valid formats making it necessary to format them again on this camcorder If You Load a Memory Card Formatted in the Different Recording Mode from the Mode Selected on the Camcorder An error message or a message to confirm if formatting is to be executed appears Cases in which an error message appears The message Cannot Use Media A Unsupported File System appears in the viewfinder in the following cases e An SxS memory card which was used for recording in UDF mode is loaded into the camcorder set to FAT mode e An SxS memory card which was used for recording in FAT mode is load
284. to 11 5V 0 1V Specifies a threshold value that step triggers a Battery End warning when a BP L60S L80S battery pack is used Other Before End 11 5V to 11 8V to 17 0V Specifies a threshold value that 0 1V step triggers a Battery Near End warning when a non Sony battery pack is used Other End 11 0V to 14 0V 0 1V Specifies a threshold value that step triggers a Battery End warning when a non Sony battery pack is used DC In Before End 11 5V to 11 8V to 17 0V 0 1V step Specifies a threshold value that triggers a Battery Near End warning when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector DC In End 11 0V to 14 0V 0 1V Specifies a threshold value that step triggers a Battery End warning when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector Detected Battery Info Sony Other DC IN Displays the results of automatic battery pack type detection Type Detection Auto Other Auto Detect the battery type automatically Other Fix battery type detection as Other Segment No 10 11 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 9 11 0V to 16 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 8 11 0V to 15 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 7 11 0V to 14 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 6 11 0V to 13 5V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 5 11 0V to 13 0V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 4 11 0V to 12 5V to 17 0V 0 1V step Segment No 3 11 0
285. to a computer over a wireless LAN Wi Fi connection by connecting the optional CBK WAO1 Wi Fi Adapter IFU WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module or CBK WA100 Wireless Adapter to the external device connector A Wi Fi connection allows you to transfer planning metadata from a computer to this camcorder and to transfer clips and other files from this camcorder to a computer You can also use the Live Logging function to transfer proxy AV data to a computer as you shoot for logging of the video currently being shot Inherits unique features of XDCAM series The camcorder inherits the workflow features of the XDCAM series including thumbnail display and metadata management and improves them by introducing an improved man machine interface Supports two viewfinder types Depending on the application you can use either the optional HDVF series viewfinder or the CBK VFO1 color viewfinder Camcorder system configuration When you install the optional CBK HD02 SDI Composite Input and 50 pin Interface you can mount the CA FB70 HD Camera Adaptor and connect the CA TX70 HD Camera Control Unit to configure a system for shooting and recording When the CBK HD02 is installed you can also connect the HDCA 702 MPEG TS Adaptor Features instead of the camera adaptor This allows you to convert this camcorder s HDSDI output to a MPEG HD transport stream Software downloads When the unit is used with a PC connection download device dr
286. to flange back Executes auto flange adjustment only for supported back adjustment lenses execute by selecting Execute Auto Shading Auto Black Shading Execute Cancel Executes auto shading Executes auto black compensation execute by selecting shading compensation Execute Reset Black Shading Execute Cancel Clears black shading compensation values execute by selecting Execute Master Gain TMP 6dB 3dB 0dB 3dB Specifies a temporary master gain 6dB 9dB 12dB 18dB value The value is the same as the 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB value selected with the GAIN switch APR APR SLS Execute Cancel Suppresses white flecks in SLS mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function execute by selecting Execute APR Preset Execute Cancel Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions execute by selecting Execute Trigger Mode i LINK Trigger Internal Both External Select Internal when recording start Makes settings related Mode and stop operations target SxS to triggers for starting and stopping recording memory cards only Select External when they target only devices connected to the i LINK HDV DV or HD SD SDI OUT connectors Select Both when they target both memory cards and external devices Menu List MAINTENANCE Menu items Sub item Settings Description Network Setting DHCP Enable Disable Selects whether
287. ttery remaining se oy w w 2 Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take E module a The DC IN voltage has Recording continues Check the power supply become low stage 1 WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining E bog e I Jee w g Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take 2 module v 8 The DC IN voltage is Recording stops Connect other power source A too low stage 2 E Recording cannot be performed WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining v z E SRA Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take H E module k 2 An error was detected Recording stops Replace the battery pack with a normal one DQ S with the battery pack a WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining EP SE a SE Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take eS module o an E S The remaining power Recording continues Refer to a Sony service representative to replace PEST of the backup battery the battery with a new one a is insufficient WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining 5 g Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take S module v artitioned memor ecording continues is card cannot be used with this camcorder a o Ap itioned y Recording i Thi d bi d with thi d A 2 card or one that Remove it and load a compatible card contains recorded clips 5 exceeding the number permitted with this
288. tus including amplifiers that produce heat e Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet e Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus e Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer e Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped WARNING Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss In order to use this product safely avoid prolonged listening at excessive sound pressure levels For the customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential ins
289. ulder strap fitting Attach the supplied shoulder strap see page 51 Accessory fitting shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light see page 50 Viewfinder front to back positioning lever To adjust the viewfinder position in the front to back direction loosen this lever and the LOCK knob After adjustment retighten this lever and the LOCK knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Loosen this ring to adjust the left to right position of the viewfinder see page 39 Viewfinder fitting shoe Attach the viewfinder g VF viewfinder connectors 26 pin rectangular and 20 pin round The analog interface connector 20 pin is for connection of an HDVF series viewfinder and the digital interface connector 26 pin is for connection of an HD viewfinder CBK VFO1 Use a connection cable to connect your viewfinder to the corresponding connector Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the same time Lens mount securing rubber After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections This fixes the lens mount preventing it from coming loose El Viewfinder front to back positioning knob LOCK knob Loosen this knob to adjust the front to back position of the viewfinder see page 39 E Fitting for optional microphone holder Fit an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder see page 46 Shoulder pad Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever
290. umbnail Operations Number of the selected frame N 2009 10 53 S amp Q Notion aig 9 01 JPANO011 1 HQ 1920 24p Clip properties are shown at the bottom of the screen Except for the items listed below the information displayed here is the same as the information displayed in the normal thumbnail screen Frame information This displays frame information using icons Fl Index picture Gl Frame with Shot Markl m Frame with Shot Mark2 The same icons are also displayed beneath the thumbnails However when several icons could be displayed for the same frame one icon is selected for display in the order of priority Index picture gt Shot Mark1 gt Shot Mark2 Timecode This displays the timecode of the selected frame in the expand thumbnail screen Expand thumbnail screen in FAT SD mode FAT SD In FAT SD mode only in the case of clips that have been split into partial files because the file size was larger than 2 GB a thumbnail of the first frame of each partial file is displayed Number of the selected frame Gum 00 00 00 00 00 09 30 00 00 19 00 00 C 60R 00 09 30 00 Clip properties are displayed at the bottom of the screen Except for the items listed below the information displayed here is the same as the information displayed in the normal thumbnail screen Timecode This is the timecode of the selected partial
291. umes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 164 Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Color Temp SW 6300K Adjust the white balance with a 6300K preset value Setting retained Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K applied to white balance adjustment values Each press of the switch or button switches in the order 3200K 4300K 5600K 6300K These can also be applied from a menu apply with Electrical CC lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt lt D gt This function is not available when Maintenance gt White Filter gt ND Filter C Temp in the setup menu is set to On If you set ND Filter C Temp to On after assigning the function the assignable switch ceases to function Setting retained CC5600K Apply a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance adjustment values Setting retained Clip Continuous Rec Turn the Clip Continuous Rec mode on or off Setting not retained Slot Select When both slots A and B have recording media inserted in them select the media to use Digital Extender Turn the screen magnification function on or off when the optional CBK HD02 SDI COMPOSITE Input and 50 Pin Interface is installed Setting not retained Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens Assignable switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on O
292. unction 83 Shooting with Slow amp Quick Motion e ue eeaeaeeasa aaa eaeaawawe 84 Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function 85 Framing Shots with the Freeze Mix Function 1 11 1 86 Recording Proxy Data ssscsscsssscsssscsssscsssessssscsscesssssseessssesessesseseseeres 87 Recording Proxy Data While Recording Clips A Recording Proxy Data for Existing CIips 88 Deleting All Proxy Data from a USB Flash Drive Planning Metadata Operations cscssssssseesseseeees 89 Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder s Internal Memory Stee tices Ra cc tuk tba Luck ue ORAL RI CO hy eek acess Lave rA 89 Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata 21411211211 1 90 Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata 92 Chapter 5 Clip Operations Clip Playback s Thumbnail Screeni e s sects i A 93 Playin Clips r OWA ROA aces AE A Pete tee eee 96 Using Thumbnails to Search Inside CIips 2 4 14 2224 12121112 97 Thumbnail Operations ccccsscssssssssscssssssscsssssssescsssesessesssssssessssesseres 98 THUMBNAIL Menu Configuration cece eseeeesereeeereeeees 98 Basic THUMBNAIL Menu Operations 100 Changing the Thumbnail Screen Type 100 Displaying Clip Properties 102 Adding and Deleting OK NG or
293. ure level Zebra2 Level 52 to 100 to 109 Specifies the Zebra2 display level Menu List sBunjes payreyaq pue nuejy 9 JajdeyD 123 sBumes pelrejeq pue nuey 9 Jade 124 OPERATION Menu items Sub item Settings Description Display On Off Video Level On Off Turns the warnings that appear when the Selects the items to Warnings video level is too bright or too dark on display in the or off viewfinder screen Sending Clip Info On Off When an optional CBK WA100 is connected this turns the clip transfer status indication on or off Brightness Display On Off Turns the numerical indication of the video brightness on or off Histogram Display On Off Turns the histogram display of video In HD mode only signal levels on or off Lens Info Meter Feet Off Selects whether or not to display the depth of field indication and the unit for display of the depth of field Meter Displayed in meters Feet Displayed in feet Off Do not display Focus Position On Off Turns the indication of the lens focus position on or off Zoom Position On Off Turns the indication of the lens zoom position on or off Audio Level Meter On Off Turns the display of the audio level meters on or off Timecode On Off Turns the display of time data timecode user bits counter duration on or off Battery Remain On Off Turns the indications of the remaining battery ti
294. val Rec Interval Recording mode S amp Q Motion Slow amp Quick Motion mode Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls 33 MGIAJ8AO Ja deyD 34 Special recording mode settings indication Appears when the camcorder is in a special recording mode Signal status indicator when the CBK WA100 is used When an optional CBK WA100 is connected to the external device connector a signal status indicator will be displayed whenever it is turned on 3G 4G appears when a 3G 4G connection exists In addition AP appears when the CBK WA100 is functioning as an access point When the CBK WA100 is functioning as an access point the signal strength is indicated by the following icons N Signal strength 1 IN Signal strength 2 I Signal strength 3 SI Signal strength 4 Remaining capacity indicator for proxy recording media when the CBK WA100 is used When an optional CBK WA100 is connected to the external device connector the remaining recording time of the SD card inserted in the CBK WA100 will be displayed as follows whenever it is turned on Ext min An invalid SD card is inserted and the remaining time cannot be displayed Ext XXXmin XXX minutes of recording is possible Ext Omin The remaining time is 0 minutes recording is not possible Ext 9999min Over 9 999 minutes of recording possible Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
295. vide Clip The properties screen of the selected frame appears and a confirmation message appears below the image 2 Select Execute and press the MENU knob The clip is divided at the selected frame and two clips with different names are created The first four characters of the clip name are taken from the name of the original clips and the last four characters are new serial numbers Example When the name of a newly recorded clip would be EFGHO100 and a clip named ABCD0002 is divided the names of the two newly created clips are ABCDO100 and ABCDO101 When there is not enough remaining capacity on the SxS memory cards to store the divided clips a message appears to inform you that there is not enough capacity Menu and Detailed Settings Setup Menu Organization and Levels On this camcorder settings for shooting and playback are made in the setup menu which appears in the viewfinder The setup menu can also be displayed on an external video monitor see page 173 Setup Menu Organization The setup menu consists of the following menus Us USER menu Menu items added in any order from other menus see page 113 Op OPERATION menu Settings related to shooting except settings related to picture quality see page 114 Pa PAINT menu Settings related to picture quality see page 133 Th THUMBNAIL menu Settings related to clip thumbnails see page 98 The THUMBNAIL menu is used only when a thumbnail s
296. viewfinder screen 4 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and press the knob A progress indication appears and execution of the format starts When formatting is completed the message Format USB Memory Done is displayed The MSSONY PRO XDCAM MEMDISC folder and the General Sony Planning folder are automatically created in the drive All data is erased when you format a USB flash drive including setup files and all of the recorded video data e Use the format function of this camcorder to format USB flash drives for use on this camcorder The formats of drives formatted on other devices are not recognized as valid formats making it necessary to format them again on this camcorder Restoring USB Flash Drives When you load a USB flash drive that can be mounted normally because the file system is destroyed a message appears on the viewfinder screen to ask whether you want to restore it Pressing the MENU knob after turning the MENU knob to select Execute starts execution Handling USB Flash Drives Buqooys b 4e deyo 75 Bunooys p Je dBUD 76 of the format and a progress indication appears When formatting is completed the message Format USB Memory Done is displayed Basic Operations Basic Operations This section explains the basic shooting and recording procedures Before starting to shoot inspect the camera system to verify that it is operating properly 1 Attacha full
297. with an OK mark can be displayed When the normal thumbnail screen is displayed you can select THUMBNAIL gt Filter Clips to switch to the screen In FAT HD mode Switched to the OK clip thumbnail screen In UDF mode By selecting one of OK NG KP Keep and None in the setting area you can display the thumbnail screen containing only clips which have been marked with the selected mark or only clips which have been marked with no marks None clips See Adding and Deleting OK NG or KP Marks page 103 for information about how to add OK marks To display the all clips thumbnail screen The all clips thumbnail screen displays thumbnails of all of the clips on the selected memory card including both HD mode and SD mode clips This is useful when you want to check whether the memory card contains clips in another mode You can switch to the all clips thumbnail screen by selecting THUMBNAIL gt All Clip Thumbnail in the setup menu in the normal thumbnails screen Pressing the RESET RETURN button returns you to the normal thumbnails screen where you can perform playback and other clip operations You cannot start playback from the all clips thumbnail screen Thumbnail Operations suonesedo dio G l8 d8UD 101 suoneado dijo G sajdeyo 102 Displaying Clip Properties The clip properties screen appears when you select Clip Properties in the THUMBNAIL menu UDF FAT HD FAT SD
298. xS memory card Proxy data Saved in lt Proav ID gt Sub Recording Proxy Data Buqooys b 4e deyo 87 Bunooys p Je dBUD 88 Metadata Saved in lt Proav ID gt Clip To stop recording of proxy data To stop recording of proxy data only without stopping recording of original data set MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Memory Rec in the setup menu to Disable If recording fails The message USB Memory Error appears If recording fails because the USB flash drive is full the message USB Memory Full appears Proxy data is saved in this unit s internal memory If recording fails because of a USB flash drive defect or for some other reason you can exchange the USB flash drive or reconnect it and rerecord the proxy data saved in internal memory Recording Proxy Data for Existing Clips You can record proxy data for clips on SxS memory cards to USB flash drives To record proxy data for all clips 1 Set MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Memory Rec in the setup menu to Enable 2 Connect a USB flash drive formatted with the FAT32 file system to the external device connector see page 75 3 Insert an SxS memory card with recorded clips 4 Select MAINTENANCE gt USB gt Copy All Clips in the setup menu and press the MENU knob 5 Turn the MENU knob to select Execute and then press the knob Recording of the proxy data starts The message Copy All Clips Done appears when recording finishes To cue up a
299. xS memory card or a USB flash drive in UDF mode The first settings stored in a file are called preset values Even after loading files to set up the camcorder and overwriting original files with new settings you can still recover preset values and reset files to their initial states see page 168 Saving Setting Data This section explains how to save setting data in an ALL file Before starting insert a writable SxS memory card into a memory card slot See Basic Setup Menu Operations page 111 for information about menu operations T Select FILE gt All in the setup menu To assign a name to the data before saving it Assign a name before proceeding to step 2 For details see To assign names to files page 167 2 Select All Save SxS gt Execute An ALL file list box appears File numbers where No File is displayed are empty file numbers File numbers with a file name or a date and time are the number of files that already contain data 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired file number 4 Press the MENU knob A confirmation message appears 5 To execute the save select Execute and then press the MENU knob To cancel the save select Cancel and then press the MENU knob If you choose to execute the save the ACCESS lamp lights in blue on the right side panel and in orange in the card slot section A completion message appears and the ACCESS lamp goes out when the dat
300. xt clip When you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear editing system a malfunction may occur depending on the nonlinear editing software in use If you specify a search speed other than 4 15 or 24 times normal with the nonlinear editing system no i LINK signal is fed out In such a case the picture on the LCD monitor may stay frozen High speed playback picture may not be displayed on the computer screen depending on the nonlinear editing software in use Setting on this camcorder Set OPERATION gt Input Output gt i LINK I O in the setup menu to Enable For operations of the nonlinear editing software refer to the operation manual of the software Recording External Input Signals The HDV stream input from a device connected via the i LINK HDV DV connector can be recorded on an SxS memory card in this camcorder The timecodes superimposed on the i LINK input are recorded regardless of the settings of the camcorder DV stream cannot be recorded T Set the external signal to a format that can be recorded on the camcorder Select an HDV compatible format SP 1440 59 941 SP 1440 50i or SP 1440 23 94P for the video format Connecting an External Device i LINK Connection 2 Make the following settings with OPERATION gt Input Output in the setup menu see page 116 e Set Output amp i LINK to HD amp HDV or SD amp HDV Set i LINK I O to Enable Set Source Select to i LINK The i
301. xternal signal Recording stops ZA input via the i LINK S 4 connection cannot be recorded as it is a DV stream WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining a s Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take amp module 5 EJ An error occurredin Recording stops If this frequently occurs change the memory card zj reading data from the after copying the clips as required SE reading data from th fi ing the cli ired memory card and playback cannot be continued WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining O aes e Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take Sk module a PM Recording cannot be Recording stops If this frequently occurs change the memory E done as an error card occurred with the memory card Operation Warnings S Z 8 z 3 8 3 a lt A x Not Enough Capacity Reached Duplication Limit Not Enough Capacity HDD A Battery End a a 2 wa S z na Z WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery remaining w gt Problem Operation in the recorder Action to take module The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted soon Recording continues Change the battery at the earliest opportunity WARNING indicator Warning sound Tally REC Battery
302. y For details see Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen on page 31 Diopter adjustment ring Allows for optimal focus adjustment Tally indicator Lights up while camcorder is recording Set the TALLY switch to OFF when not in use The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY switch This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings in the same manner as the camera operator tally indicator and the recording red tally indicators in the viewfinder E PEAKING control Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness and makes focusing easier This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder E CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder BRIGHT control Adjusts the brightness of the screen This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder HIGH The tally indicator brightness is set to high OFF The tally indicator is disabled LOW The tally indicator brightness is set to low ZEBRA zebra pattern switch Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder screen as follows ON A zebra pattern appears and stays OFF The zebra pattern disappears MOMENT A zebra pattern appears and stays for about five seconds DISPLAY ASPECT switch Turns the marker indication on and off and switc
303. y charged battery pack see page 37 Select the recording mode see page 55 Load one or two SxS memory cards see page 71 If you load two cards the camcorder switches automatically to the second card when the first card becomes full 4 Set the camcorder s POWER switch see page 15 to ON D Make the following settings Marker display On see page 121 Tris Auto see page 61 Zoom Auto Camera output Select the picture currently being shot camera picture and turn the DCC function on see page 19 Timecode advance mode F RUN Free Run or R RUN Rec Run see page 64 Audio input channel selection Auto see page 27 6 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to the BLACK side to adjust the black balance see page 56 T Select a filter according to the lighting conditions and adjust the white balance see page 57 8 Point the camcorder at the subject and adjust the focus and zoom 9 it you are using the electronic shutter select an appropriate shutter mode and speed see page 59 10 Do one of the following to start recording Press the REC START button see page 17 Press the VTR button on the lens Turn on the assignable switch to which the Rec function has been assigned see page 162 During recording the TALLY indicators the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light Adjust the zoom and focus as required Never

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"